SENTRA 2016 SENTRA OWNER’S MANUAL - שירות … Sentra... · 2016 SENTRA OWNER’S MANUAL For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. 2016 NISSAN SENTRA B17-D B17-D

®

2016 SENTRAOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2016 N

ISS

AN

SE

NTR

AB

17-D

B17-D

Printing : February 2016

Publication No.: OM2E 0B16U3

Printed in U.S.A.

OM16EM 0B17U1

JOBNAME: 1942834-2016-sni-own PAGE: 1 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Fri Mar 11 11:41:54 2016

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best.When you require any service or have any ques-tions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options, your ve-hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-cessories installed prior to delivery. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for detailsconcerning the particular accessories with whichyour vehicle is equipped. It is important that youfamiliarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,cautions and instructions concerning proper useof such accessories prior to operating the vehicleand/or accessory. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which your vehicle isequipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance require-ments assisting you in the safe operation of yourvehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

� REVIEW COPY—2016 Sentra (sni)Owners Manual—Israel (isr)03/10/16—dmoore �


MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability andmay

even violate governmental regulations. In

addition, damage or performance prob-

lems resulting from modifications may

not be covered under NISSANwarranties.

This manual includes information for all featuresand equipment available on this model. Featuresand equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,date of production, region or availability. There-fore, you may find information about features orequipment that are not included or installed onyour vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications, performance, design or compo-nent suppliers without notice and without obliga-tion. From time to time, NISSAN may update orrevise this manual to provide Owners with themost accurate information currently available.Please carefully read and retain with this manualall revision updates sent to you by NISSAN toensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. If youhave questions concerning any information inyour Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL



If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Panasonic and Bosch.

© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

APD1005





Table of ContentsIllustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10




0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9



1. Top tether anchor (P. 1-18)2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-9)3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag (P. 1-38)

4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)5. Front seat belts with pretensioner(s)and shoulder height adjuster(P. 1-9, 1-38)

6. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-38)7. Front seats (P. 1-2)8. Occupant classification sensor(weight sensor) (P. 1-38)

9. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag (P. 1-38)

10. Rear seats (P. 1-2)11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-18)Refer to the page number indicated in pa-rentheses for operating details.

LII2403

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents



1. Engine hood (P. 3-18)2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-26)3. Windshield (P. 8-19)4. Power windows (P. 2-40)5. Door locks (P. 3-4)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-6)Keys (P. 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-24)7. Tire pressure (P. 8-33)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)Tire chains (P. 8-33)

8. Headlight and turn signal switch(P. 2-28)Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-28)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-rentheses for operating details.

LII2447

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3



1. Trunk lid (P. 3-19)Trunk lid release (P. 3-19)

2. High-mounted stop light (P. 8-27)3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)4. Rear window defogger switch (P. 2-27)5. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-20)

Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-20)Fuel recommendation (P. 9-2)

7. Rearview camera (P. 4-7)Refer to the page number indicated in pa-rentheses for operating details.

LII2382

EXTERIOR REAR




1. Interior lights (P. 2-42)2. Sun visors (P. 3-23)3. Rearview mirror (P. 3-24)4. Glove box (P. 2-34)5. Cup holders (P. 2-34)6. Parking brake (P. 5-17)7. Front console (P. 2-34)8. Rear armrest (P. 1-2)

Cup holders (P. 2-34)Refer to the page number indicated in pa-rentheses for operating details.

LII2448

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT




1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turnsignal switch (P. 2-28)

2. Vehicle information display controls(P. 2-14)Audio control (P. 4-21)

3. Driver’s supplemental air bag (P. 1-38)Horn (P. 2-32)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-18)Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System(P. 4-51, 4-61)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-26)7. Vents (P. 4-13)8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)9. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-38)10. Audio system (P. 4-21)11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-38)12. Glove box (P. 2-34)13. Shift lever (P. 5-12)14. Power outlet (P. 2-34)15. Climate controls (P. 4-14)16. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-7)17. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-22)18. Hood release (P. 3-18)

LII2449

INSTRUMENT PANEL




19. Fuel filler door release (P. 3-20)20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-33)SPORT mode switch (P. 5-17)ECO mode switch (P. 5-18)

21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-28)Power mirror switch (P. 3-24)Trunk release (P. 3-19)

* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).





MRA8DE engine

1. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)2. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)3. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)4. Battery (P. 8-13)5. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-22)6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)7. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)9. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)Refer to the page number indicated in pa-renthesis for operating details.

LDI2931

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS




Warninglight

Name Page

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warn-ing light

2-8

Brake warning light 2-8

Charge warning light 2-8

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-9

Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight

2-10

Master warning light 2-10

Power steeringwarning light

2-11

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-11

Warninglight

Name Page

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-11

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Front fog light indi-cator light (if soequipped)

2-12

Front passenger airbag status light

2-12

High beam indicatorlight (blue)

2-12

Malfunction Indica-tor Light (MIL)

2-12

Overdrive OFF indi-cator light

2-13

Security indicatorlight

2-13

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Side light and head-light indicator light(green)

2-13

Slip indicator light 2-13

SPORT mode indi-cator light

2-13

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-13

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFFindicator light

2-13

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS




MEMO




1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Adjustable head restraint/headrestcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Non-adjustable head restraint/headrestcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Rear-facing child restraint installation usingLATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Rear-facing child restraint installation usingthe seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Forward-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56



WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back andupright in the seat with both feet on thefloor and adjust the seat properly. Foradditional information, refer to “Pre-cautions on seat belt usage” in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, do not leavechildren, people who require the assis-tance of others or pets unattended inyour vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-ture inside a closed vehicle on a warmday can quickly become high enough tocause a significant risk of injury ordeath to people and pets.

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation. The seat may movesuddenly and could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

● The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort. Seatbelts are most effective when the pas-senger sits well back and straight up inthe seat. If the seatback is reclined, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andbeing injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system



CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENTYour vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. Foradditional information about adjusting the seats,refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while youslide the seat forward or backward to the desiredposition. Release the bar to lock the seat inposition.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,the seatback can be reclined to allow occupantsto rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is in P (Park).

LRS2642 LRS2643

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3



Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjustthe seat height until the desired position isachieved.

FOLDING REAR SEAT

Pull the knob�A to fold each seatback down.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury or death inan accident or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

LRS2644 LRS2194




Center armrest

Pull the armrest down until in resting position.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplementthe other vehicle safety systems. Theymayprovide additional protection against in-jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-able head restraints/headrests must beadjusted properly, as specified in this sec-tion. Check the adjustment after someoneelse uses the seat. Do not attach anythingto the head restraint/headrest stalks orremove the head restraint/headrest. Donot use the seat if the headrestraint/headrest has been removed. Ifthe head restraint/headrest was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the headrestraint/headrest before an occupantuses the seating position. Failure to fol-low these instructions can reduce the ef-fectiveness of the headrestraints/headrests. This may increasethe risk of serious injury or death in acollision.

The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints/headrests.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equippedwith a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

● Your vehicle is equipped with a headrestraint/headrest that may be integrated,adjustable or non-adjustable.

LRS2217 LRS2000

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS




● Adjustable head restraints/headrests havemultiple notches along the stalk(s) to lockthem in a desired adjustment position.

● The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notch tosecure them to the seat frame.

● Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the headrestraint/headrest so the center of yourear is approximately level with the centerof the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than therecommended alignment, place the headrestraint/headrest at the highest position.

● If the head restraint/headrest has been re-moved, ensure that it is reinstalled andlocked in place before riding in that desig-nated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTRAINT/HEADRESTCOMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2300 LRS2299




REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the headrestraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to thehighest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest fromthe seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly ina secure place so it is not loose in thevehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrestraint/headrest before an occupant usesthe seating position.

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks withthe holes in the seat. Make sure that thehead restraint/headrest is facing the correctdirection. The stalk with the notch (notches)

�1 must be installed in the hole with the lockknob�2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push thehead restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrestbefore an occupant uses the seating posi-tion.

LRS2302 LRS2303




ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the centeris level with the center of your ears. If your earposition is still higher than the recommendedalignment, place the head restraint/headrest atthe highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notchbefore riding in that designated seating position.

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.


WRS0134 LRS2351 LRS2305




Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint/headrest down.


PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in a collision and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

LRS2306 SSS0136

SEAT BELTS




WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be in the rearseats and in an appropriate restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do somayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occur ifthe seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016




WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● No changes should be made to the seatbelt system. For example, do not modifythe seat belt, add material, or installdevices that may change the seat beltrouting or tension. Doing so may affectthe operation of the seat belt system.Modifying or tampering with the seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have ac-tivated, they cannot be reused andmustbe replaced together with the retractor.It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware, shouldbe inspected after any collision. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

SSS0014




SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats areequipped with a seat belt warning light. Thewarning light, located on the instrument panel,will show the status of the driver and passengerseat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning lightwill not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warninglights, indicator lights and audible reminders” inthe “Instruments and controls” section of thismanual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should beworn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest.Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be in the rearseats and in an appropriate restraint.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back andupright in the seat with both feet on thefloor and adjust the seat belt properly.

● Do not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR)mode seat belts. If the seatbelt becomes wrapped around a child’sneck with the ALR mode activated, thechild can be seriously injured or killed ifthe seat belt retracts and becomestight. This can occur even if the vehicleis parked. Unbuckle the seat belt torelease the child. If the seat belt cannotbe unbuckled or is already unbuckled,release the child by cutting the seat beltwith a suitable tool (such as a knife orscissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS0786




Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle�A untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock dur-ing a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits the seatbelt to move and allows you somefreedom of movement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Thensmoothly pull the belt out of the re-tractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips�B as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack�C . Be surethe shoulder belt is routed over your shoul-der and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have two modesof operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend andretract to allow the driver and passengers some

LRS2642 LRS2674 LRS2675




freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locksthe seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidlyor during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks theseat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. For additionalinformation, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-tion.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by an occupant, the ALRmodeshould not be activated. If it is activated, itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion. It can also change the operation ofthe front passenger air bag. For additionalinformation, refer to “Front passenger airbag and status light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely securedin the latched position. If they are notcompletely secured, passengers may beinjured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on thebuckle�1 . The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check,get the system checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or tolearn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139




Shoulder belt height adjustment (frontseats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. For additionalinformation, refer to “Precautions on seat beltusage” in this section. To adjust, pull out theadjustment button�1 andmove the shoulder beltanchor to the desired position �2 , so the beltpasses over the center of the shoulder. The beltshould be away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Release the adjustmentbutton to lock the shoulder belt anchor into posi-tion.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender that is compatible withthe installed seat belts is available for purchase.The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)of length and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assis-tance with purchasing an extender if an extenderis required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured or killed in a collisionor a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

LRS0242




● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seatbelts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat beltbecomes wrapped around a child’s neckwith the ALRmode activated, the child canbe seriously injured or killed if the seatbelt retracts and becomes tight. This canoccur even if the vehicle is parked. Un-buckle the seat belt to release the child. Ifthe seat belt cannot be unbuckled or isalready unbuckled, release the child bycutting the seat belt with a suitable tool(such as a knife or scissors) to release theseat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear-facing child restraints

● Forward-facing child restraints

● Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facingchild restraints. Forward-facing child restraintsare available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.Booster seats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longeruse a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. The lapbelt may not fit over their small hip bones.In an accident, an improperly fitting seatbelt could cause serious or fatal injury.Always use appropriate child restraints.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle byusing either the LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicleseat belt. For additional information, refer to“Child restraints” in this section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.

CHILD SAFETY




Studies show that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (air bag system) for the front passen-ger. For additional information, refer to“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” inthis section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear-facing child restraint. You should choosea child restraint that fits your vehicle and alwaysfollow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-lation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facingchild restraint as long as possible up to the heightor weight limit of the child restraint. Children whooutgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year oldshould be secured in a forward-facing child re-straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur-er’s instructions for minimum and maximumweight and height recommendations. You should

choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle andalways follow the manufacturer’s instructions forinstallation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing childrestraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-mum height or weight limit allowed by the childrestraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limitof the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-straint, NISSAN recommends that the child beplaced in a commercially available booster seat toobtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fitproperly, the booster seat should raise the childso that the shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the chest and the top, middle portion ofthe shoulder. The shoulder belt should not crossthe neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-der. The lap belt should lie snugly across thelower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. Abooster seat can only be used in seating posi-tions that have a three-point type seat belt.

A booster seat should be used until the child canpass the seat belt fit test below:

● Are the child’s back and hips against thevehicle seatback?

● Is the child able to sit without slouching?

● Do the child’s knees bend easily over thefront edge of the seat with feet flat on thefloor?

● Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lapbelt low and snug across the hips and shoul-der belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

● Is the child able to use the properly adjustedhead restraint/headrest?

● Will the child be able to stay in position forthe entire ride?




If you answered no to any of these questions, thechild should remain in a booster seat using athree-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow dif-ferent guidelines. Check local and stateregulations to confirm your child is usingthe correct restraint system before travel-ing.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seatand do not allow a child in the cargo area.The child could be seriously injured orkilled in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– The child restraint must be used andinstalled properly. Always follow allof the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS




– Infants and children should never beheld on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-gest adult cannot resist the forces ofa collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both achild and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a forward-facing childrestraint in the front seat, refer to“Forward-facing child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” in thissection.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat.An inflating air bag could seriouslyinjure or kill a child. A rear-facingchild restraint must only be used inthe rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraintthat will fit the child and vehicle.Some child restraints may not fitproperly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damagethe child restraint anchorages. Thechild restraint will not be properlyinstalled using the damaged anchor-age, and a child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

– Never use the anchor points for adultseat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate child re-straint while in the vehicle.

● When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, loose objects can injure occupantsor damage the vehicle.

WRS0256




CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seating sur-face and buckles before placing a child inthe child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem. Some child restraints include rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these anchors. For additional informa-tion, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth-ers for CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and children of various sizes. When se-lecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

● If the combined weight of the child and childrestraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), youmay use either the LATCH anchors or theseat belt to install the child restraint (not bothat the same time).

● If the combined weight of the child and childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint.

● Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions for installation.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH system compat-ible child restraints. This system may also bereferred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatiblesystem. With this system, you do not have to usea vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraintunless the combined weight of the child and childrestraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and child restraint isgreater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’sseat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

LATCH system lower anchor locations

WRS0756




child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to installchild restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-tions only. Do not attempt to install a child re-straint in the center position using the LATCHanchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-tions for proper use and installation ofchild restraints could result in serious in-jury or death of a child or other passen-gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH lower anchors. The child re-straint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower anchorarea. Feel to make sure there are noobstructions over the anchors suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushionmaterial. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the lower an-chors are obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damagethe child restraint anchorages. Thechild restraint will not be properlyinstalled using the damaged anchor-age, and a child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. A label isattached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH lower anchors.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700




Installing child restraint LATCH loweranchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in the in-structions provided by the child restraint manu-facturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor point locations

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used to at-tach adult seat belts, or other items orequipment to the vehicle. Doing so coulddamage the child restraint anchorages.The child restraint will not be properlyinstalled using the damaged anchorage,and a child could be seriously injured orkilled in a collision.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662 LRS0723




The child restraint top tether strap must be usedwhen installing the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchor attachments or seat belts. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Installing top tetherstrap” in this section.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap child restraint, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Anchor points�1 are located on the rear parcelshelf.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warningsand Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Childrestraints” sections of this manual before install-ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combinedweight of the child and the child restraint exceeds65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of thechild and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not thelower anchors) to install the child restraint. Besure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801




3. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug itforward and check to see if the LATCH at-tachment holds the restraint in place. If therestraint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put the restraintin another seat and test it again. You mayneed to try a different child restraint or tryinstalling by using the vehicle seat belt (ifapplicable). Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673


LRS0674




5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 1through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision.



Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.


WRS0256




2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). Itreverts to the ELR mode when the seat beltis fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.


WRS0761


LRS2395


LRS2396




5. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCH



Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the LATCH system:



WRS0762


LRS2397




2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. For additional information, refer to “In-stalling top tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require theuse of a top tether strap in seating positionsthat do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correct childrestraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest isremoved, store it in a secure place. Be sureto reinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information about headrestraint/headrest adjustment, refer to“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest and it isinterfering with the proper child restraint fit,try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0800




4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug itforward and check to see if the LATCH at-tachment holds the restraint in place. If therestraint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put the restraintin another seat and test it again. You mayneed to try a different child restraint. Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 1through 6.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671


WRS0697




�1 Top tether strap

�2 Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be usedwhen installing the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchors (rear outboard positions only).

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Position the top tether strap �1 over theseatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint�2 on the back side of the seatbackbehind the child restraint.


If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING


FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the operationof the front passenger air bag. For addi-tional information, refer to “Front passen-ger air bag and status light” in this section.

Rear seats

LRS2627




For additional information, refer to all Warningsand Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Childrestraint” sections of this manual before installinga child restraint.


Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belt in therear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and, there-fore, must not be used in the front seat.


The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correct childrestraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest isremoved, store it in a secure place. Be sureto reinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information about headrestraint/headrest adjustment, removal andinstallation, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest and it isinterfering with the proper child restraint fit,try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –step 1

WRS0699




3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. For additional information, refer to “In-stalling top tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require theuse of a top tether strap in seating positionsthat do not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). Itreverts to ELR mode when the seat belt isfully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.


WRS0680


LRS0667


LRS0668




6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.


8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2through 8.


WRS0681


WRS0698




10. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch intheON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If thislight is not illuminated, refer to “Front pas-senger air bag and status light” in this sec-tion.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.

�1 Top tether strap

�2 Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be usedwhen installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS




CENTER SEATING POSITION




If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Forward-facing — step 10

WRS0475

Rear seats

LRS2627




WARNING


BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a boosterseat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-lined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not usedproperly, the risk of a child being injuredor killed in a sudden stop or collisiongreatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’s faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under the child’sarm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has alap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

LRS2479




Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat is chosen, the vehicleseatback must be at or above the center ofthe child’s ears. If the seatback is lower thanthe center of the child’s ears, a high backbooster seat should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place the child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with thechild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use thelap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Lock-ing Retractor (ALR) mode when using abooster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warningsand Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child re-straints” and “Booster seats” sections of thismanual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0453 LRS0464




1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. If the headrestraint/headrest is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint/headrest when thebooster seat is removed. For additionalinformation about head restraint/headrestadjustment, removal and installation, refer to“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in “Three-point type seat belt withretractor” in this section.

WRS0699

Front passenger position

LRS0454




7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch intheON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. For addi-tional information, refer to “Front passengerair bag and status light” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRSThis SRS section contains important informationconcerning the following systems:

● Driver and front passenger supplementalfront-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced AirBag System)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force tothe chest area of the driver and front passenger incertain side impact collisions. The side air bagsare designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force tothe head of occupants in the outboard seatingpositions in certain side-impact or rollover colli-sions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate on the side where the vehicleis impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags on bothsides are designed to inflate and remain inflatedfor a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crashprotection provided by the driver and front pas-senger seat belts and is not a substitute forthem. Seat belts should always be correctly wornand the occupant seated a suitable distanceaway from the steering wheel, instrument paneland door finishers. For additional informationabout instructions and precautions on seat beltusage, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7 sec-onds if the system is operational.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (SRS)




WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Front passenger air bagand status light” in this section.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in anyway, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always properly use theseat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheNISSAN Advanced Air Bag Systemmonitors the severity of a collision andseat belt usage, then inflates the airbags as needed. Failure to properlywear seat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-senger air bag OFF under some condi-tions. This sensor is only used in thisseat. Failure to be properly seated andwearing the seat belt can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.For additional information, refer to“Front passenger air bag and statuslight” in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

WRS0031




WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041




ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044




WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teensand children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat, if possible.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. For additionalinformation, refer to “Child restraints”in this section.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact and rollover supplemental airbags:

● The side air bags and curtain air bagsordinarily will not inflate in the event ofa frontal impact, rear impact, or lowerseverity side collision. Always wearyour seat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256 WRS0431




WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain air bags aremost effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat with both feet on the floor. Theside air bag and curtain air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

SSS0162 WRS0032




SSS0159 SSS0162




NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

1. Top tether anchor

2. Rear seat belts

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bag

4. Head restraints/headrests

5. Front seat belts

6. Supplemental front-impact air bags

7. Front crash zone sensor

8. Pressure sensors in door (front passengerside shown; driver’s side similar)

9. Front seats

10. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

11. Satellite crash zone sensor

12. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

13. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

14. Rear seats

15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system

16. Satellite crash zone sensorLRS2774




WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air bag System,please observe the following items.

● Do not allow a passenger in the rearseat to push or pull on the seatbackpocket.

● Do not place heavy loads heavier than2.2 lbs (1 kg) on the seatback, headrestraint/headrest or in the seatbackpocket.

● Do not store luggage behind the seatthat can press into the seatback.

● Do not position the front passengerseat so it contacts the rear seat. If thefront seat does contact the rear seat,the air bag system may determine asensor malfunction has occurred andthe front passenger air bag status lightmay illuminate and the supplementalair bag warning light may flash.

● If a forward facing child restraint is in-stalled in the front passenger seat, donot position the front passenger seat sothe child restraint contacts the instru-ment panel. If the child restraint doescontact the instrument panel, the sys-temmay determine the seat is occupiedand the passenger air bag may deployin a collision. Also the front passengerair bag status light may not illuminate.For additional information about in-stalling and using child restraints, referto “Child restraints” in this section.

● Confirm the operating condition withthe front passenger air bag status light.

● If you notice that the front passenger airbag status light is not operating as de-scribed in this section, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerto check the occupant classificationsystem.

● Until you have confirmed with a dealerthat your passenger seat occupant clas-sification system is working properly,position the occupants in the rear seat-ing positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and frontpassenger seats. All of the information, cau-tions and warnings in this manual must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thefront passenger supplemental front-impact airbag is mounted in the dashboard above the glovebox. The front air bags are designed to inflate inhigher severity frontal collisions, although theymay inflate if the forces in another type of collisionare similar to those of a higher severity frontalimpact. They may not inflate in certain frontalcollisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is notalways an indication of proper front air bag sys-tem operation.

The NISSANAdvanced Air Bag Systemmonitorsinformation from the crash zone sensor, the Airbag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision and seat beltusage for the driver. For the front passenger, theoccupant classification sensor is also monitored.Based on information from the sensor, only onefront air bag may inflate in a crash, depending onthe crash severity and whether the front occu-pants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, thefront passenger air bag may be automaticallyturned off under some conditions, depending onthe weight detected on the front passenger seat




and how the seat belt is used. If the front passen-ger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag statuslight will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied,the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag willbe off). For additional information, refer to “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” in this section.One front air bag inflating does not indicate im-proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer to obtain information about thesystem. If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, you may alsocontact NISSAN. Contact information is con-tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the front occupants. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seatbelts should be correctly worn and the driver andfront passenger seated upright as far as practicalaway from the steering wheel or instrumentpanel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order tohelp protect the front occupants. Because of this,the force of the front air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, oris against, the front air bag module during infla-tion.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is placed in the ON position.


Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some condi-tions. Read this section carefully to learnhow it operates. Proper use of the seat,seat belt and child restraints is necessaryfor most effective protection. Failure tofollow all instructions in this manual con-cerning the use of seats, seat belts andchild restraints can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

WRS0475




Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with anoccupant classification sensor (weight sensor)that turns the front passenger air bag on or offdepending on the weight applied to the frontpassenger seat. The status of the front passen-ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front

passenger air bag status light which islocated on the instrument panel.After the ignition switch is placed in the �ON�position, the front passenger air bag status lighton the instrument panel illuminates for about7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-nated depending on the front passenger seatoccupied status. The light operates as follows:

● Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:

The light is OFF and the front passen-ger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in acrash.

● Front passenger seat occupied by a smalladult, child or child restraint as outlined in

this section: The light illuminates toindicate that the front passenger air bag isOFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied front passenger seat and the pas-senger meets the conditions as outlined in

this section: The light is OFF to indi-cate that the front passenger air bag is op-erational.

In addition to the above, certain objects placedon the front passenger seat may also cause thelight to operate as described above dependingon their weight.

For additional information related to the normaloperation and troubleshooting of this occupantclassification sensor system, please refer to“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in thissection.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below. If thefront passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate ina crash. The driver air bag and other air bags inyour vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turnedOFF. Certain sensors are used tomeet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this vehicleis a weight sensor. It is designed to detect anoccupant and objects on the seat by weight. Forexample, if a child is in the front passenger seat,the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a childrestraint of the type specified in the regulations ison the seat, its weight and the child’s weight canbe detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the frontpassenger air bag to be automatically turnedOFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,however if the occupant takes his/her weight offthe seat cushion (for example, by not sitting up-right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or byotherwise being out of position), this could causethe sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always besure to be seated and wearing the seat beltproperly for the most effective protection by theseat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor is designed to operate asdescribed above to turn the front passenger airbag OFF for specified child restraints as requiredby the regulations. Failing to properly securechild restraints and to use the ALR mode mayallow the restraint to tip or move in a collision orsudden stop. This can also result in the passen-ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being




OFF. For additional information about proper useand installation, refer to “Child restraints” in thissection.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, thefront passenger air bag is designed not to inflatein a crash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, youcan monitor when the front passenger air bag isautomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the frontpassenger air bag status light is illuminated (indi-cating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the front passenger air bag status light may ormay not be illuminated, depending on the size ofthe child and the type of child restraint beingused. If the air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate in acrash), it could be that the child restraint or seatbelt is not being used properly. Make sure thatthe child restraint is installed properly, the seatbelt is used properly and the occupant is posi-tioned properly. If the air bag status light is still notilluminated, reposition the occupant or child re-straint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will notilluminate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the sys-tem is OFF by using a special tool. However, untilyou have confirmed with a dealer that your air bagis working properly, reposition the occupant orchild restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System and frontpassenger air bag status light will take a fewseconds to register a change in the front passen-ger seat status. For example, if a large adult whois sitting in the front passenger seat exits thevehicle, the front passenger air bag status lightwill go from OFF to ON for a few seconds andthen to OFF. This is normal system operation anddoes not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges areaof the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-tem checked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensorsystem to classify the front passenger based onweight, please follow the precautions and stepsoutlined below:

Precautions

● Make sure that there are no objects weigh-ing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat orplaced in the seatback pocket.

● Make sure that a child restraint or otherobject is not pressing against the rear of theseatback.

● Make sure that a rear passenger is not push-ing or pulling on the back of the front pas-senger seat.

● Make sure that the front passenger seat orseatback is not forced back against an ob-ject on the seat or floor behind it.

● Make sure that there is no object placedunder the front passenger seat.




Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”section of this manual. Sit upright, leaningagainst the seatback, and centered on theseat cushion with your feet comfortably ex-tended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seatbelts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds al-lowing the system to classify the front pas-senger before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking thefront passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-sor system locks the classification duringdriving so it is important that you confirmthat the front passenger is properly classi-fied prior to driving. Also, the occupantclassification sensor system may recalcu-late the weight of the occupant when thevehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stopsign, etc.), so front passenger seat occu-pants should continue to remain seated asoutlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag status lightis incorrect:

1. If the light is ONwith no front passenger andno objects on the front passenger seat:

This may be due to the following conditions thatmay be interfering with the weight sensors:

● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-ing on the seat or placed in the seatbackpocket.

● A child restraint or other object pressingagainst the rear of the seatback.

● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on theback of the front passenger seat.

● Forcing the front seat or seatback against anobject on the seat or floor behind it.

● An object placed under the front passengerseat.

● An object placed between the seat cushionand center console or between the seatcushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stopwhen it is safe to do so. Check and correct any ofthe above conditions. Restart the vehicle andwait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed duringwhich the front passenger air bag statuslight will remain lit for about 7 secondsinitially.

If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle shouldbe checked as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying thefront passenger seat:

● Occupant is a small adult — the air bag lightis functioning as intended. The front passen-ger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, thenthis may be due to the following conditions thatmay be interfering with the weight sensors:

● Occupant is not sitting upright, leaningagainst the seatback, and centered on theseat cushion with his/her feet comfortablyextended to the floor.








● An object placed between the seat cushionand center console or between the seatcushion and the door.


NOTE:


If the light is still ON after this, the person shouldbe advised not to ride in the front passenger seatand the vehicle should be checked as soon aspossible. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child orchild restraint occupying the front passen-ger seat.

This may be due to the following conditionsthat may be interfering with the weight sen-sors:

● Small adult or child is not sitting upright,leaning against the seatback, and centeredon the seat cushion with his/her feet com-fortably extended to the floor.

● The child restraint is not properly installed,as outlined in the “Child restraints”section ofthis manual.

● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-ing on the seat or placed in the seatbackpocket.





● An object placed between the seat cushionand center console.


NOTE:


If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,child or child restraint should be repositioned inthe rear seat and the vehicle should be checkedas soon as possible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steeringwheel pad or on the instrument panel.Also, do not place any objects betweenany occupant and the steering wheel orinstrument panel. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles and causeinjury if the front air bags inflate.




● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Removing or modifying the front pas-senger seat may affect the function ofthe air bag system and result in seriouspersonal injury.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classificationsensor (weight sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

● It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe front air bag. It is also recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor installation of electrical equipment.The Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthor-ized electrical test equipment and prob-ing devices should not be used on theair bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified repairfacility. A cracked windshield could af-fect the function of the supplemental airbag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the front air bag systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.




Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain air bagsare located in the side roof rails. All of theinformation, cautions and warnings in thismanual must be followed. The side air bagsand curtain air bags are designed to inflate inhigher severity side collisions, although they mayinflate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity impact. They

are designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-tain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate incertain types of rollover collisions or near roll-overs. As a result, certain vehicle movements (forexample, during severe off-roading) may causethe curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain airbag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followedby release of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should be takennot to inhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breathing con-dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest andpelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain airbags help to cushion the impact force to the headof occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-ing positions. They can help save lives and re-duce serious injuries. However, an inflating sideair bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasionsor other injuries. Side air bags and curtain airbags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away aspractical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflatequickly in order to help protect the front and rearoutboard occupants. Because of this, the force ofthe side air bag and curtain air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, these air bag modulesduring inflation. The side air bag and will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a shorttime.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-erate only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.


LRS0259




WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain air bag system componentswill be hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damage to oraccidental inflation of the side air bagand curtain air bag or damage to theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the frontseats by placing material near the seat-backs or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.

● It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. It is also recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-tion of electrical equipment. The SRSwiring harnesses* should not be modi-fied or disconnected. Unauthorizedelectrical test equipment and probingdevices should not be used on the sideair bag or curtain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain air bag systems and guide the buyer tothe appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioner(s) cannot be reusedafter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but pretensioner(s) are not ac-tivated, be sure to have the preten-sioner system checked and, if neces-sary, replaced. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioner(s). Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.




● It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe pretensioner system. It is also rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for installation of electricalequipment. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.

● If you need to dispose of the preten-sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. Incorrect dis-posal procedures could cause personalinjury.

The pretensioner system may activate with thesupplemental air bag system in certain types ofcollisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat beltwhen the vehicle becomes involved in certaintypes of collisions, helping to restrain front seatoccupants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seatbelt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixedto the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts areused the same way as conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limitersallow the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light isused to indicate malfunctions in the pretensionersystem. For additional information, refer to�Supplemental air bag warning light� in this sec-tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bagwarning light indicates there is a malfunction,have the system checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

WRS0897




WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint ona seat protected by an air bag in front of it.If the air bag deploys, it may cause seriousinjury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-sioner(s) and all related wiring.When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-sioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side airbag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems maynot operate properly. They must be checked andrepaired. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-sioner systems will not operate in an acci-dent. To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have your vehicle checked as soonas possible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LRS0100




Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bagsand pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on aone-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it isdamaged, the supplemental air bag warning lightremains illuminated after inflation has occurred.These systems should be repaired and/or re-placed as soon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should bepointed out to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition switch should always beplaced in the LOCK position when working underthe hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain air bag has inflated, the air bagmodule will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, the acti-vated pretensioner(s) must also be re-placed. The air bag module and preten-sioner(s) should be replaced. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. However, the airbag module and pretensioner(s) cannotbe repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag systems and the pretensionersystem should be inspected if there isany damage to the front end or sideportion of the vehicle. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag or pretensioner systemsor scrap the vehicle, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrectdisposal procedures could cause per-sonal injury.

● If there is an impact to your vehicle fromany direction, your Occupant Classifica-tion Sensor (OCS) should be checked toverify it is still functioning correctly. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. The OCS shouldbe checked even if no air bags deploy asa result of the impact. Failure to verifyproper OCS function may result in animproper air bag deployment resultingin injury or death.




2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . 2-15

Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Vehicle information display warnings andindicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Storage Pouches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Seatback pocket(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Slide front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40



Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45



1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turnsignal switch (P. 2-28)

2. Vehicle information display controls(P. 2-14)Audio control (P. 4-21)

3. Driver’s supplemental air bag (P. 1-38)Horn (P. 2-32)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-18)Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System(P. 4-51, 4-61)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-26)7. Vents (P. 4-13)8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)9. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-38)10. Audio system (P. 4-21)11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-38)12. Glove box (P. 2-34)13. Shift lever (P. 5-12)14. Power outlet (P. 2-34)15. Climate controls (P. 4-14)16. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-7)17. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-22)18. Hood release (P. 3-18)

LII2449

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls



19. Fuel filler door release (P. 3-20)20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-33)SPORT mode switch (P. 5-17)ECO mode switch (P. 5-18)

21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-28)Power mirror switch (P. 3-24)Trunk release (P. 3-19)

* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).


1. TachometerWarning and indicator lights

2. Vehicle information displayOdometerTwin trip odometerOutside temperature display

3. SpeedometerWarning and indicator lights

4. Fuel gauge5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

LIC3489

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3



SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer andodometer. The speedometer is located on theright side of the meter cluster. The odometer islocated within the vehicle information display.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer�2 and the twin trip odometer�1are displayed when the ignition switch is placedin the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

LIC2218 LIC3526




Changing the display

Press the button on the steering wheel tochange the display.Trip A and Trip B are vehicle information displayscreens that can be turned ON/OFF in the MeterSettings. For additional information, refer to “Me-ter settings” in this section.

Resetting the trip odometer

Press the button on the steering wheel formore than 1 second to reset the currently dis-played trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine intothe red zone�1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, reduce engine speed. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in theON position for the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range when the reading is within the zone

�A shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC3548 LIC3427




CAUTION

If the gauge indicates a coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasethe temperature. If the gauge is over thenormal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the vehiclemay seriously damage the engine. For ad-ditional information, refer to “If your ve-hicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section for immediate actionrequired

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) maycome on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips. the lightshould turn off. If the light remains onafter a few driving trips, have the vehicleinspected. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthis section.

LIC2222




Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light

Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Charge warning light Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light SPORT mode indicator light

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light (blue) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicatorlight

Power steering warning light Overdrive OFF indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTSWith all doors closed, apply the parking brake,fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switchin the ON position without starting the engine.The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

, , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will come onbriefly and then go off:

, , , , SPORT ,

If any light does not come on or operate in a wayother than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have thesystem checked. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayedon the vehicle information display between thespeedometer and tachometer. For additional in-formation, refer to “Vehicle information display” inthis section.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATORLIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS




WARNING LIGHTSAnti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,the ABS warning light illuminates and then turnsoff. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicatethe ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. Foradditional information, refer to “Brake system” inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is running,with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. For additional information, re-fer to “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort and pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warningindicator

When the parking brake is released and thebrake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brakewarning light and the ABS warning light illumi-nates, it may indicate the ABS is not functioningproperly. Have the brake system checked and, ifnecessary, repaired. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Avoidhigh-speed driving and abrupt braking. For addi-tional information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, have the sys-tem checked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.




CAUTION

● Do not ground electrical accessories di-rectly to the battery terminal. Doing sowill bypass the variable control systemand the vehicle battery may not chargecompletely. For additional information,refer to “Variable voltage control sys-tem” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

● Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.

A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warningalso appears in the vehicle information dis-play.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjust thetire pressure of all four tires to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16mph (25 km/h) toactivate the TPMS and turn off the low tirepressure warning light. Use a tire pressuregauge to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning ap-pears each time the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position as long as the low tire pressurewarning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-mation display” in this section, “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving”section and in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isplaced in theON position. The light will remain onafter 1 minute. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

For additional information, refer to “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, have the vehicle checked as soonas possible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.




● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could resultin serious personal injury or death.Check the tire pressure for all four tires.Adjust the tire pressure to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure show onthe Tire and Loading Information labellocated in the driver’s door opening toturn the low tire pressure warning lightOFF. If the light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tire pressure,a tire may be flat or the TPMS may bemalfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. If no tire is flat and all tires areproperly inflated, have the vehiclechecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● Since the spare tire is not equippedwithTPMS, when a spare tire ismounted or awheel is replaced the TPMS will notfunction and the low tire pressure warn-ing light will flash for approximately1 minute. The light will remain on after1 minute. Have your tires replacedand/or TPMS system reset as soon aspossible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 mph (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the four wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield-washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer

fluid, as necessary. For additional information,refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,the master warning light illuminates if any of thefollowing are displayed on the vehicle informationdisplay:

● No key warning

● Low washer fluid warning

● Parking brake release warning

● Door open warning

● Loose fuel cap warning

● Check tire pressure warning

● Emergency brake warning

● Lock warning

● I-Key system warning

● Headlight system warning

● ITS warning

● Shipping mode warning

● Low oil pressure warning




For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-mation display” in this section.

Power steering warning light

WARNING

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

● When the power steering warning lightilluminates with the engine running,there will be no power assist for thesteering. You will still have control ofthe vehicle, but the steering will beharder to operate. Have the powersteering system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the power steering warning light illumi-nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-ing warning light turns off. This indicates thepower steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminateswhile the engine is running, it may indicate thepower steering is not functioning properly andmay need servicing. Have the power steering

checked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illumi-nates with the engine running, there will be nopower assist for the steering, but you will stillhave control of the vehicle. At this time, greatersteering effort is required to operate the steeringwheel, especially in sharp turns and at lowspeeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-ing” in the “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’sseat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chimesounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” inthe “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-sioner seat belt systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioners may not function properly. For addi-tional information, refer to “Supplemental Re-




straint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionof this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag systemsand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Front fog light indicator light (ifso equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illuminates whenthe front fog lights are ON. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag statuslight

The front passenger air bag status light will be litand the passenger front air bag will be off de-pending on how the front passenger seat is beingused.

For additional information, refer to “Front passen-ger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-fillercap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs outof fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap isinstalled and closed tightly, and that the vehiclehas at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in thefuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when theengine is not running, it indicates that the vehicleis not ready for an emission control systeminspection/maintenance test. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Readiness forinspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-nical and consumer information” section of thismanual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

● MIL on steady—An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected. Check thefuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAPwarning appears in the vehicle informationdisplay. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or miss-ing, tighten or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the lightdoes not turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service. You do not need to have yourvehicle towed to the dealer.

● MIL blinking — An engine misfire has beendetected which may damage the emissioncontrol system. To reduce or avoid emissioncontrol system damage:




– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.You do not need to have your vehicle towed to thedealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Overdrive OFF indicator light

This light illuminates and then turns off when theignition switch is placed to the ON position, andwhen the overdrive OFF mode is selected.

For additional information, refer to “ContinuouslyVariable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.

The blinking security indicator light indicates thatthe security systems equipped on the vehicle areoperational.

For additional information, refer to “Security sys-tems” in this section.

Side light and headlightindicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-nates when the side light or headlight position isselected. For additional information, refer to“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) system is operating, thus alertingthat the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. Theroad surface may be slippery.

SPORT mode indicator light

The SPORT mode indicator light illuminateswhen the SPORT mode is turned ON. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC offswitch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the VDCsystem has been turned off.

Push the VDC off switch again or restart theengine and the system will operate normally. Foradditional information, refer to “Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

The VDC indicator light also comes on when youplace the ignition switch in the ON position. Thelight will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light stays on or

comes on along with the indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the VDC systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.




While the VDC system is operating, you mightfeel a slight vibration or hear the system workingwhen starting the vehicle or accelerating, but thisis normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orOFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCKposition with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle.Make sure the ignition switch is placed in theLOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key withyou when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if theIntelligent Key is left inside the vehicle whenlocking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, besure to check both the vehicle and the IntelligentKey. For additional information, refer to “NISSANIntelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section of this manual.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and thevehicle is driven. The chimewill stop if the parkingbrake is released or the vehicle speed returns tozero.

The vehicle information display is located to theleft of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

● Vehicle settings

● Trip computer information

● Drive system warnings and settings

● Cruise control system information

● NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation informa-tion

● Indicators and warnings

LIC2630

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY




HOW TO USE THE VEHICLEINFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be changed

using the , , and ENTER buttonslocated on the steering wheel.

�1 — navigate through the items in thevehicle information displayENTER — change or select an item in thevehicle information display

�2 — go back to the previous menu

�3 —select/enter the vehicle informationdisplay menu items or to change from onedisplay screen to the next (i.e. trip, TPMS,Fuel economy)

The ENTER and buttons also control audioand control panel functions. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Steering wheel switch for audiocontrol” in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-tioner, audio and phone systems” section of thismanual.

STARTUP DISPLAYWhen the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACCposition the screens that display in the vehicleinformation include:

● Active system status (if so equipped)

● Trip computer

● Tire pressure information

● Fuel economy

● Warnings

● Outside air temperature

● Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer

Warnings will only display if there are any pres-ent. For additional information, refer to “Vehicleinformation display warnings and indicators” inthis section.

To control what items display in the vehicle infor-mation display, refer to “Meter settings” in thissection.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the infor-mation displayed in the vehicle information dis-play:

● Clock

● Meter Settings

● Vehicle Settings

● Maintenance

● Alarm

● Tire Pressures

● Unit

● Language

● Factory Reset

LIC3465




Clock

Menu item Result

Clock When selected, the following message appears: “Set Clock in Audio” For additional information, refer to “Audio system” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” section of this manual.

Meter Settings

The meter settings allow the user to change thesettings for the vehicle information display

Menu item Result

Main Menu Selection Displays the available options

Home Allows user to turn the Home screen ON/OFF in the vehicle information display

Average Speed Allows user to turn the Average Speed screen ON/OFF in the vehicle information display

Trip A Allows user to turn the Trip A ON/OFF in the vehicle information display

Trip B Allows user to turn the Trip B ON/OFF in the vehicle information display

Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the Fuel Economy ON/OFF in the vehicle information display

Audio Allows user to turn the Audio screen ON/OFF in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Audiosystem” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” section of this manual.

ECO Mode Settings Displays the available options for ECO Mode Settings

ECO Indicator Allows the user to turn the ECO Indicator ON/OFF in the vehicle information display

DISP Mode Allows user to select how the ECO Mode in displayed

Pedal Select to have the ECO Mode shown as a pedal display

Inst.FE Select to have the ECO Mode shown as instant fuel economy

ECO Drive Report Displays the available options for the ECO Drive Report

Display Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report ON/OFF

View History Allows user to view and reset ECO Drive report history

Welcome Effect Displays the available options for the Welcome Effect




Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings allow the user to change thesettings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, andother vehicle settings.

Menu item Result

Lighting Displays the available option for lighting

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the Auto Room Lamp ON/OFF

Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle

Locking Displays the available Locking options.

I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn I-Key Door Lock ON/OFF. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated




Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to setreminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not asubstitute for regular tire checks, includ-ing tire pressure checks. For additionalinformation, refer to “Changing wheelsand tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of thismanual. Many fac-tors including tire inflation, alignment,driving habits and road conditions affecttire wear and when tires should be re-placed. Setting the tire replacement indi-cator for a certain driving distance does

not mean your tires will last that long. Usethe tire replacement indicator as a guideonly and always perform regular tirechecks. Failure to perform regular tirechecks, including tire pressure checkscould result in tire failure. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to acollision, which could result in seriouspersonal injury or death.

Menu item Result

Maintenance Displays various Maintenance settings

Oil and Filter This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing the engine oil and oil filter. Youcan set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer tothe “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.”

Tire This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing tires. You can set or reset thedistance for checking or replacing tires.

Other This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items other thanthe engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. The distancefor checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.




Alarms

The Alarms menu allows the user to set variousalerts.

Menu item Result

Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the Outside Temp. alarm ON/OFF

Timer Alert Allows user to set the Timer Alert for a specific interval

Phone Allows user to turn the Phone alarm ON/OFF

Mail Allows user to turn the Mail alarm ON/OFF

Unit

The Unit menu allows the user to change theunits shown in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result

Mileage Displays the available mileage display units

Temperature Displays the available temperature display units




Language

The languagemenu allows the user to change thelanguages displayed in the vehicle informationdisplay.

Menu item Result

Language Displays the available languages in which the vehicle information display will be shown

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to restorethe vehicle information display settings to factorystatus.

Menu item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user canconfirm or deny the reset




VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAYWARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. Door Open

2. Trunk Open

3. Release Parking Brake

4. Shift to Park

5. Low Fuel

6. Low Washer Fluid

7. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

8. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

9. Headlight System Error: See Owner’sManual (if so equipped)

10. Loose Fuel Cap

11. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

LIC3549




12. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

13. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

14. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

15. Push brake and start button to drive

16. Illumination indicator

17. Low Outside Temperature

18. Cruise control indicator

Door Open

This warning illuminates when a door has beenopened.

Trunk Open

This warning illuminates when the trunk has beenopened when the engine is running.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message area ofthe vehicle information display when the parkingbrake is set and the vehicle is driven.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ACC or OFF position and the shift leveris not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chimesounds when the ignition switch is in the ACC orOFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever tothe P (Park) position and start the engine.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in thefuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuel gaugereaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-serve of fuel in the tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ONposition, this light comes on for a period of timeand then turns off.

The I-Key System Error message warns of amalfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If thelight comes onwhile the engine is stopped, it maybe impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,you can drive the vehicle. However in these

cases, have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears in the message area of thevehicle information display if low oil pressure isdetected. This gauge is not designed to indicatelow oil level. The low oil pressure warning isnot designed to indicate a low oil level. Usethe dipstick to check the oil level. For additionalinformation, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’sManual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the LED headlightsare not functioning properly.

If this warning appears, have your systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap isnot tightened correctly after the vehicle has beenrefueled. For additional information, refer to“Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section of this manual.




Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire pressurewarning light in the meter illuminates and low tirepressure is detected. The warning appears eachtime the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition as long as the low tire pressure warninglight remains illuminated. If this warning appears,stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures ofall four tires to the recommended COLD tirepressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label. For additional information, refer to“Low tire pressure warning light” in this sectionand “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an error withyour TPMS. If this warning comes on, have thesystem checked. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

This warning appears when the headlights areleft in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTOposition. For additional information, refer to“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended storageswitch is not pushed in. When this warning ap-pears, push in the extended storage switch toturn off the warning. For additional information,refer to “Extended storage switch” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

Push brake and start button to drive

This indicator appears when the shift lever is inthe P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start bypushing the ignition switch with the brake pedaldepressed. You can start the engine from anyposition of the ignition switch.

Illumination indicator

This indicator appears when the vehicle informa-tion display screen brightness is being adjusted.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside temperatureis below 3°C (37°F). The temperature can bechanged to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. Foradditional information, refer to “Settings” in thissection.

Cruise control indicator

This indicator shows the cruise control systemstatus.

For additional information, refer to “Cruise con-trol” in the “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.




Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps detect vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with:

● the power door lock switch (if the door isopened, locked and then closed).

● the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-gent Key models).

● any request switch (Intelligent Key mod-els).

● the key fob or Intelligent Key.

Key fob and Intelligent Key operation:

● Press the button. All doors lock.The hazard lights flash twice and the hornbeeps once to indicate all doors arelocked.

● When the button is pressed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. For addi-tional information, refer to “Silencing thehorn beep feature” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section in thismanual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes

on. The light stays on for about30 seconds. The vehicle security system isnow pre-armed. After about 30 seconds thevehicle security system automatically shifts

into the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’sdoor is unlocked by the key, a requestswitch, the key fob or Intelligent Key, or if theignition switch is placed in the ACC or ONposition, the system will not arm.

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)




● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails toglow for a period of time, unlock thedoor once and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition switch placed in theOFF position.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security systemwill give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates ifthe vehicle is tamperedwith again. The alarmcan be shut off by unlocking the driver’s doorwith the key, a request switch, by pressing

the button on the key fob or IntelligentKey or placing the ignition switch in the ONor ACC position.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key, arequest switch, key fob or Intelligent Key(even if the door is unlocked by using theinside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ONposition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.




Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK orACC position. This function indicates theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is opera-tional.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, seek service for theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob�A .

�2 Low (LO)—continuous low speed operation

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up�4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

LIC0474 WIC2748

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH




Pull the lever toward you �5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefogger before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate thewasher continuouslyfor more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir isempty.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with windshield-washer fluidconcentrates at full strength. Somemethyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may perma-nently stain the grille if spilled whilefilling the windshield-washer fluidreservoir.

● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-centrates with water to the manufactur-er’s recommended levels before pour-ing the fluid into the windshield-washerfluid reservoir. Do not use thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir tomix the windshield-washer fluid con-centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is inter-rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stopmoving to protect its motor. If this occurs,turn the wiper switch to the OFF positionand remove the snow or ice that is on andaround the wiper arms. In approximately1 minute, turn the switch on again to oper-ate the wiper.

To defog the rear window glass and outsidemirror (if so equipped), start the engine and pushthe rear window defogger switch on. The rearwindow defogger indicator light on the switchcomes on. Push the switch again to turn thedefogger off.

The rear window defogger automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defogger.

LIC2324

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped) DEFOGGERSWITCH




NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires onthe rear window are not part of the rearwindow defogger system. These wiresmake up the antenna for the audio system.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

�1 Rotate the switch to the position, andthe front parking, tail, license plate, and in-strument panel lights will come on.

�2 Rotate the switch to the position, andthe headlights will come on and all the otherlights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3240

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3241

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH




Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on a period of time afteryou turn the key to OFF and all doors areclosed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the timedelay for autolight shutoff is adjustable forvehicles with navigation system. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle set-tings” in this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion�1 .

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain on for a period of time. If another door isopened while the headlights are on, then thetimer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, , or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor located in the top sideof the instrument panel. The autolight sen-sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,the autolight sensor reacts as if it is darkout and the headlights will illuminate. Ifthis occurs while parkedwith the engine offand the key in the ON position, your vehi-cle’s battery could become discharged.

WIC1437




Headlight beam select

�1 To select the high beam function, ensure thelow beams are engaged, and push the leverforward. The high beam lights come on and

the blue indicator light illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to return to the low beam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off. The lowbeams need not be engaged for this func-tion.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

while the headlight switch is in the

or position, the headlights will turn off aftera period of time.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLPress the “+” button�A to increase the bright-ness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “-” button�B to decrease the bright-ness of instrument panel lights.

LIC3250 LIC2418




TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

�1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal

�2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

The turn signal will automatically flash threetimes.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch

to the position, then turn the fog light

switch to the position.

If the headlight switch is in the AUTO positionand the fog light switch is moved to the ONposition, both the fog lights and the headlights(including all other outside lights) will turn on.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position, the headlights must be on,then turn the fog light switch to the “Fog lamp”position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

Using the fog light switch in AUTO mode forcesthe headlights to come on, even if the light sensorhas not activated them. The fog lights automati-cally turn off when the high beam headlights areselected.

LIC3252 LIC3256




To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on thesteering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, asdesired. The indicator light in the switch willilluminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use theseat heater if you or the occupants cannotmonitor elevated seat temperatures orhave an inability to feel pain in body partsthat contact the seat. Use of the seatheater by such people could result in seri-ous injury.

CAUTION

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion or seat cover, etc. Otherwise, theseat may become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

LIC1389 LIC3037

HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if soequipped)




● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checked.It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC sys-tem on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn on the system. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

LIC3344

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH




The power outlet is for powering electrical acces-sories such as cellular telephones. It is rated at12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The power outlet is powered only when the igni-tion switch is in the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for addi-tional information.

● Do not usewith accessories that exceeda 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

● Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights, or rear windowdefogger is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

MAP POCKETSCenter Console

LIC3457 LIC2426

POWER OUTLET STORAGE




STORAGE POUCHES

A storage pouch is located on the front of thedriver’s and passenger’s seats.

WARNING

● Do not store angular, sharp, heavy ob-jects or objects that cannot fully fit in-side the pouch because they might in-crease the likelihood of an injury in acrash.

To ensure proper operation of the pas-senger’s advanced air bag system,please observe the following items:

● Do not place loads heavier than 0.25 kg(0.55lb) on the cushion storage pouch.

● Do not place a combined weight ex-ceeding 1 kg (2.2lb) on the seatback,head restraint, seatback pocket andstorage pouch at the same time.

SEATBACK POCKET(s)

The seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s (if so equipped) and passenger’sseats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

LIC2704 LIC1328




WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,please observe the following items:

● Do not allow a passenger in the rearseat to push or pull on the seatbackpocket or head restraint.

● Do not place heavy loads heavier than1 kg. (2.2 lbs.) on the seatback, headrestraint or in the seatback pocket.

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

Storage Tray (if so equipped)

LIC3458 LIC2422




GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, press in on the lever�1and raise the lid�2 .

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

SLIDE FRONT ARMREST

To adjust the front armrest, take the leather coverand slide it to the front or rear.

LIC3057 LIC1026 LIC2652




SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to avoid obstructing the driver’sview and to help prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

LIC2312

Front cup holders

LIC2424




Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

Rear cup holders

LIC2656

Front bottle holder

LIC2423

Rear bottle holder

LIC2425




POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use thewindow lock switch toprevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadvertentdoor lock activation, do not leave chil-dren, people who require the assistanceof others or pets unattended in yourvehicle. Additionally, the temperatureinside a closed vehicle on a warm daycan quickly become high enough tocause a significant risk of injury ordeath to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, or for aperiod of time after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of time, thepower to the windows is canceled.

Driver’s side power window switch

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side switch

4. Right rear passenger side

5. Left rear passenger side

6. Driver side automatic switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch and continueto hold it down until the desired window positionis reached. To close a window, pull the switchand continue to hold it up until the desired win-dow position is reached.

LIC3208

WINDOWS




Front passenger’s power windowswitch

The passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch to the first detentand continue to hold it down until the desiredwindow position is reached �1 . To close thewindow, pull the switch to the first detent andcontinue to hold it up until the desired windowposition is reached�2 .

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down�1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up�2 .

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, push the window switch down to thesecond detent and release it; it need not be held.The window automatically opens all the way. Tostop the window, lift the switch up while thewindow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held. The windowautomatically closes all the way. To stop the win-dow, push the switch down while the window isclosing.

WIC1129 LIC2663 LIC0410




Auto-reverse function

If the control unit detects something caught in thewindow as it is closing, the window will be imme-diately lowered.

The auto-reverse function may be activated whenthe window is closed by automatic operationwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition or for a period of time after the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

When power window switch does notoperate

If the power window automatic function (closingonly) does not operate properly, perform the fol-lowing procedure to initialize the power windowsystem:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Open the window more than halfway byoperating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold it toclose the window, and then hold the switchmore than 3 seconds after the window isclosed.

4. Release the power window switch. Operatethe window by the automatic function toconfirm the initialization is complete. Thepower window automatically opens orcloses depending on if the automatic downor up function is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for otherwindows.

If the power window function does not operateproperly after performing the above procedurehave the system checked and repaired. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

�1 The interior light can be turned on regardlessof door position. The light will go off after aperiod of time unless the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position when any door isopened.

�2 The interior lights can be set to operatewhen the doors are opened. To turn off theinterior lights when a door is open, push theswitch; the interior lights will not illuminate,regardless of door position.The lights will go off when the ignition switchis placed in the ON position, or the driver’sdoor is closed and locked. The lights will alsogo off after a period of time when the doorsare open.

LIC2302

INTERIOR LIGHTS




NOTE:

The step lights illuminate when the driverand passenger doors are opened regard-less of the interior light switch position.These lights will turn off automatically aftera period of time while doors are open toprevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)

The console light will turn on whenever the park-ing lights or headlights are illuminated.

DOME LIGHT

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position �1 , theinterior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-tion. The lights will go off after a period of timeunless the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orON position.

LIC2303 SIC2063A




When the switch is in the DOOR position�2 , theinterior lights will stay on for a period of timewhen:

● The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a key,or the power door lock switch, while alldoors are closed and the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is activatedwhen:

● The driver’s door is locked by the key fob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition.

When the switch is in the OFF position�3 , theinterior lights do not illuminate, regardless of doorposition.

The lights will turn off automatically after a periodof time while doors are open to prevent the bat-tery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION


MAP LIGHTS

Press the button to turn the map lights on. To turnthem off, press the button again.

CAUTION


LIC2304




The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after a period of time if thetrunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

For additional information, refer to “Exterior andinterior lights” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TRUNK LIGHT




MEMO




3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Warning lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Trunk lid release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Card holder (driver’s side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24



1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)2. Mechanical keys3. Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Your vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKeys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-ligent Key System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-tered and used with one vehicle. The new keysmust be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior touse with the Intelligent Key System of your ve-hicle. Since the registration process requires

erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-nents when registering new keys, be sure to takeall Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSANdealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the keynumber. NISSAN does not record key numbersso it is very important to keep track of your keynumber plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, it can be duplicatedwithout knowing the key number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 60°C (140°F).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer.

LPD2440

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments



Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lockknob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it intothe Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns tothe lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock thedriver’s door.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installedin the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors” in thissection.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)

You can only drive your vehicle using the masterkeys which are registered to the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System components in your vehicle.These keys have a transponder chip in the keyhead.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your existing key canbe duplicated without knowing the key number.As many as four NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem keys can be used with one vehicle. Youshould bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer forregistration. This is because the registration pro-cess will erase the memory of all key codespreviously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-cess, these components will only recognize keyscoded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem during registration. Any key that is not givento the NISSAN dealer at the time of registrationwill no longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,which contains an electrical transponder,to come into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect system function.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3



When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors cannot be openedusing the inside or outside door handles. Thedoors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

● To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadvertentdoor lock activation, do not leave chil-dren, people who require the assistanceof others or pets unattended in yourvehicle. Additionally, the temperatureinside a closed vehicle on a warm daycan quickly become high enough tocause a significant risk of injury ordeath to people and pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key asshown.

Manual

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of thevehicle�1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear�2 .

Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front�1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear�2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral�3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 60 seconds unlocksall doors�4 .

Driver’s side

LPD2129

Driver’s side

LPD0461

DOORS




Opening and closing windows

The driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position�1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position�2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position�1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position�2 .

Inside lock

SPA2726

Door lock switch

LPD2093




Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved to thelock position and any door is open, all doors willlock and unlock automatically.With the IntelligentKey left in the vehicle and any door open, all doorswill unlock automatically and a chime will soundafter the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the IntelligentKey from being accidentally locked inside thevehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

● All doors lock automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when the ig-nition is placed in the OFF position.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position�2 , thedoor can be opened from the outside or theinside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position�1 ,the door can be opened only from the out-side.

WARNING


● The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communi-cation systems. Do not operate the In-telligent Key while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated unin-tentionally when the unit is stored for aflight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all thedoor locks using the remote control function orpushing the request switch on the vehicle withouttaking the key out from a pocket or purse. Theoperating environment and/or conditions may af-fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key system.

LPD2117





CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.Environmental conditions may interfere with theoperation of the Intelligent Key system under thefollowing operating conditions:

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver or aCB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately two years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-

ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blinkgreen for about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-tered and used with one vehicle. For informationabout the purchase and use of additional Intelli-gent Keys, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.




If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range from the request switch�1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key operating rangebecomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key maynot function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)from each request switch�1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,handle or rear bumper, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someonewho does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push therequest switch to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2402




DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key held in your hand asillustrated. The close distance to the doorhandle will cause the Intelligent Key systemto have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-gent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle requestswitch, verify the doors are securely lockedby testing them.

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being leftinside the vehicle, make sure you carry theIntelligent Key with you and then lock thedoors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushingthe door handle request switch. The doorwill be unlocked but will not open. Releasethe door handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors and trunk lidwithout taking the Intelligent Key out of yourpocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, youcan lock or unlock all doors and trunk lid bypushing the door handle request switch withinthe range of operation.

WPD0375 LPD2074




Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position,place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and make sure you carry the IntelligentKey with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch �1while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe outside buzzer sounds twice.

NOTE:

● Doors and trunk lid lock with the door handlerequest switch while the ignition switch isnot in the LOCK position.

● Doors and trunk lid do not lock by pushingthe door handle request switch while anydoor is open. However, doors lock with themechanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors and trunk lid do not lock with the doorhandle request switch with the IntelligentKey inside the vehicle; a beep sounds towarn you. However, when an Intelligent Keyis inside the vehicle, doors can be lockedwith another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure that the doorshave been securely locked by operatingthe door handle or the trunk openerswitch.

● When locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure to have theIntelligent Key in your possession be-fore operating the request switch toprevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protectionis equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doorsare locked and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;the lock will automatically unlock and the doorbuzzer sounds.

LPD2441 LPD2401




NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-ating the request switch to lock the door.Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket oryour other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not functionunder the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the rear parcel shelf.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on orunder the spare tire area.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch�1 .

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and theoutside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch �1again within 1 minute to unlock all doors andthe trunk lid.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking thedoors, that door may not be unlocked. Returningthe door handle to its original position will unlockthe door. If the door does not unlock after return-ing the door handle, push the door handle re-quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors and trunk lid will be locked automaticallyunless one of the following operations is per-formed within 1 minute after pushing the requestswitch.

● Opening any door or the trunk lid.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

LPD2441 LPD2401




The interior light timer illuminates for a period oftime when a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.The interior light can be turned off without waitingby performing one of the following operations.

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote control.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch�A formore than 1 second while carrying the Intel-ligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will soundfour times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection isequipped with the Intelligent Key.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid isclosed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk willopen.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● The Intelligent Key is not within the opera-tional range.

● The doors or the trunk are open or notclosed securely.

● The Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.

LPD2122




Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors and the trunk lid will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 1 min-ute to unlock all doors and trunk lid.

All doors and trunk lid will be locked automaticallyunless one of the following operations is per-

formed within 1 minute after pressing thebutton:

● Opening any doors or trunk lid.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

WPD0359 WPD0360




The interior light illuminates for a period of timewhen a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting byperforming one of the following operations:

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk releasebutton will not operate when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds oncemore.

WPD0447 WPD0362




The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

�1 P (Park) position selecting warninglight

�2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLEREMINDERS

The Intelligent Key is equipped with a functionthat is designed to minimize improper operationsand to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen.The warning buzzer sounds and the warning lightilluminates when improper operations are de-tected.

CAUTION

When the buzzer sounds and the warninglight illuminates, be sure to check both thevehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning light comes onin the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warninglight comes on, be sure to check the vehicle andthe Intelligent Key.

Audible reminder and warning whenlocking the doors

When the chime or buzzer sounds from insideand outside the vehicle, check for the following:

● The ignition switch is placed in the LOCKposition.

● The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-hicle.

● The shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

LPD2118




Audible reminder and warning whenthe engine stops

When the P position selecting warning light

( ) in the instrument panel blinks in red:

● Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)position.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

● Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)position and the ignition switch is placed inthe LOCK position.

If the chime sounds continuously when the driv-er’s door is opened, check the following:

● The shift lever is placed in the P (Park)position and the ignition switch is placed inthe LOCK position.

● The warning chime may stop when one ofthe following is performed:

– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

– Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when the enginestarts

When the Intelligent Key system warning light

( ) blinks red and the outside buzzersounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside thevehicle.

Warning for low battery powerWhen the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-

ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blinkgreen for about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. This warningis to let you know that the battery of the IntelligentKey will run down soon. Replace it with a newone. For additional information, refer to “Batteryreplacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.It is recommended that you replace the battery ata NISSAN dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Key frombeing left in the vehicle

If you lock all doors using the power door lockswitch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all ofthe doors unlock immediately and the buzzer willwarn you when the door is closed.




TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to stopthe engine

The P (Park) warning light in the instrumentpanel illuminates and the inside chimesounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Make sure that the shift lever is in the P(Park) position.

When placing the shift lever in the P (Park)position

The inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

When pushing the door handle requestswitch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a fewseconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

When closing the doors

The key warning light in the instrumentpanel blinks in yellow, the outside chimesounds three times and the inside warningchime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

The P (Park) warning light in the instrumentpanel illuminates and the outside chimesounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFFposition and the shift lever is not in the P(Park) position.

Make sure that the shift lever is in the P(Park) position and place the ignition switchin the OFF position.

The outside chime sounds for approximately3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately10 seconds and the trunk lid opens. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch to startthe engine

The key warning light in the instrumentpanel blinks in green.

The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. Foradditional information, refer to “Battery re-placement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

When pressing the LOCK button on theIntelligent Key to the lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few sec-onds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the doors securely.




1. Pull the hood lock release handle�1 locatedbelow the instrument panel until the hoodsprings up slightly.

2. Locate the lever�2 in between the hood andgrille and push the lever sideways with yourfingertips.

3. Raise the hood�3 .

4. Remove the support rod�4 and insert it intothe slot marked by an arrow�5 .

NOTE:

Do not place the support rod in a locationother than the designated slot.

Hold the coated parts�A when removing orresetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-tact with the metal parts, as they may behot immediately after the engine has beenstopped.

When closing the hood, return the support rod toits original position, lower the hood to approxi-mately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and releaseit. This allows proper engagement of the hoodlatch.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

LPD2323

HOOD




TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH

WARNING

● Donot drivewith the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. For addi-tional information, refer to “Exhaustgas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.


To open the trunk lid, push the opener switchdown.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

NOTE:

You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-gent Key. For additional information, referto “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in this sec-tion.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk wherethey could be seriously injured. Keep thecar locked, with the rear seatback andtrunk lid securely latched when not in use,and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism providesa means of escape for children and adults in theevent they become locked inside the trunk.

LPD2119 LPD2081

TRUNK LID




To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-nated release handle until the lock releases andpush up on the trunk lid. The release handle ismade of a material that glows in the dark after abrief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located below theinstrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pullthe release. To lock, close the fuel-filler doorsecurely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

LPD2022

FUEL-FILLER DOOR




● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or deathwhen filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into thefuel-filler tube, then tighten until thefuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tightenthe fuel-filler cap properly may cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate. If the light il-luminates because the fuel-filler cap isloose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light doesnot turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

● For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise toremove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder�1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the cap clockwise until clicks are heard.

LPD2082




LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message dis-plays in the vehicle information display when thefuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after thevehicle has been refueled. It may take a fewdriving trips for the message to be displayed. Toturn off the warning message, do the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-viously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset but-ton �A located on the steering wheel forabout one second to turn off the LOOSEFUEL CAP warning message�B after tight-ening the fuel-filler cap.

TILT OPERATION

Pull the lock lever down�1 and adjust the steer-ing wheel up or down�2 to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up �1 firmly to lock thesteering wheel in place.

TELESCOPIC OPERATION

Pull the lock lever down�1 and adjust the steer-ing wheel forward or backward�3 to the desiredposition.

Push the lock lever up �1 firmly to lock thesteering wheel in place.

LPD2398 LPD2123

STEERING WHEEL




�1 To block glare from the front, swing down thesun visor.

�2 To block glare from the side, remove the sunvisor from the center mount and swing thevisor to the side.

�3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out asneeded.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing the extension to its originalposition.

● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-ibly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

WPD0315

LPD2101

SUN VISORS




CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)

To access the card holder, pull the sun visordown and slide card in the card holder. Do notview information while operating the vehicle.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEWMIRROR

The night position �1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position�2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rearview clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Move the small switch�1 to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch�2 .

LPD2120 WPD0126 LPD0237

MIRRORS




WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Heated mirrors

The electric control type outside mirrors can beheated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improvedvisibility. For additional information, refer to “Rearwindow and outside mirror defogger switch” inthe “Instruments and controls” section of thismanual.

LPD2112




4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — color screen withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

How to use the MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL(volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Difference between predicted and actualdistances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Heater and Air Conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port(models without Navigation System)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port(models with Navigation System)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40iPod®* player operation without NavigationSystem (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42iPod®* player operation with NavigationSystem (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44Bluetooth® streaming audio withoutNavigation System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47Bluetooth® streaming audio with NavigationSystem (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47



CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-49Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System withoutnavigation system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54Menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Phone Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68



WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming from it,stop using the system immediately. Ig-noring such conditions may lead to ac-cidents, fire or electrical shock. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for servicing.

1. Display screen

2. button**

3. MAP button*

4. NAV (navigation) button*

5. MENU button

6. BACK button

7. TUNE knob / AUDIO button

8. (brightness control) button

LHA2516

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems



9. ON-OFF button/ VOL (volume) control knob

10. CAMERA button

* For additional information regarding the Naviga-tion system control buttons, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

** For additional information regarding theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System controlbutton, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem with Navigation System” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will discharge the battery, and theengine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to akey shown only on the display. These keys can beselected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION

● The glass display screen may break if itis hit with a hard or sharp object. If theglass screen breaks, do not touch it.Doing so could result in an injury.

● To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

● Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system tomalfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not availablewhile driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-ate the navigation system.

WARNING

● ALWAYS give your full attention todriving.

● Avoid using vehicle features that coulddistract you. If distracted, you couldlose control of your vehicle and causean accident.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3



Touch-screen operation

Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to return to theprevious screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “�” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time,or touch the double up arrow to scroll up an entire page. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time, ortouch the double down arrow to scroll down an entire page.

Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.

Space Inserts a space.

Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.

OK Completes the character input.




Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, softcloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use asmall amount of neutral detergent with a softcloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe thescreen.

HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON

To select and/or adjust several functions, fea-tures and modes that are available for your ve-hicle:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Touch the desired item.

Menu item Result

Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.

Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.

Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respectivetimes of day while “Automatic” controls the display automatically.

Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose either “Up” or “Down”.

Clock Settings Touch this key to adjust the time.

LHA4014




Menu item Result

Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Date Format Select from five possible formats displaying the day, month, and year.

Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock usingthe “Set Clock Manually” key.

Set ClockManually

Adjust the clock manually. Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must be setto manual for this option to be available.

Daylight Sav-ings Time

Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.

Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Adjusts the language on the display.

Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched.

System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the

screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.

Factory Settings Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON

Press the BACK button to return to the previousscreen.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, press

the button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to the day or the night display.

Press and hold the button for more than2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the buttonagain to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE ON-OFFBUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROLKNOB

Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio functionon and off. Turn the volume control knob to adjustaudio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERABUTTON

The CAMERA button toggles ON-OFF guide-lines shown on the RearView Monitor. For addi-tional information, refer to “RearView Monitor” inthis section.




1. CAMERA button (if so equipped) WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the Rear-View Monitor system could result in se-rious injury or death.

● RearViewMonitor is a convenience fea-ture and is not a substitute for properbacking. Always turn and look out thewindows and check mirrors to be surethat it is safe to move before operatingthe vehicle. Always back up slowly.

LHA3884

REARVIEW MONITOR




● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in showing large stationary ob-jects directly behind the vehicle, to helpavoid damaging the vehicle.

● The distance guide line and the vehiclewidth line should be used as a referenceonly when the vehicle is on a levelpaved surface. The distance viewed onthe monitor is for reference only andmay be different than the actual dis-tance between the vehicle and dis-played objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens whencleaning dirt or snow from the front of thecamera.

The RearView Monitor system automaticallyshows a rear view of the vehicle when the shiftlever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position.While in R (Reverse), pressing the CAMERAbutton (if so equipped) will cycle through guide-line options. The radio can still be heard while theRearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitorsystem uses a camera located just above thevehicle’s license plate�1 .

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMOPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, movethe shift lever to the R (Reverse) position tooperate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle widthand distances to objects with reference to thevehicle body line�A are displayed on themonitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

● Red line�1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)

● Yellow line�2 : approx. 1 m (3 ft)

● Green line�3 : approx. 2 m (7 ft)

● Green line�4 : approx. 3 m (10 ft)

LHA4183 LHA2944




Vehicle width guide lines�5

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEENPREDICTED AND ACTUALDISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations onthe ground are for approximate reference only.Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-ing objects will be actually located at distancesdifferent from those displayed in the monitor rela-tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). Whenin doubt, turn around and view the objects as youare backing up, or park and exit the vehicle toview the positioning of objects behind the ve-hicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-tance guide lines and the vehicle width guidelines are shown closer than the actual distance.Note that any object on the hill is further than itappears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle width guidelines are shown farther than the actual distance.Note that any object on the hill is closer than itappears on the monitor.

LHA4184 LHA4185




Backing up behind a projecting object

The position�C is shown farther than the position�B in the display. However, the position �C isactually at the same distance as the position�A .The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position �A if the object projects over theactual backing up course.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

The procedure for adjusting the display settingsof the screen differs depending on the type ofscreen present on the vehicle.

For vehicles without navigation:

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shiftlever in R (Reverse).

2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. The screen will display the Brightness set-tings.

LHA4186

Models without navigation

LHA3639




4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust thesetting up or down.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again todisplay the Contrast settings.

6. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust thesetting up or down.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to com-plete the adjustment.

Models with navigation:

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shiftlever in R (Reverse).

2. Press the button on the control panel.

3. The screen will display the Night settings.

4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting upor down.

5. Press the button again to access theAuto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting upor down.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings ofthe RearView Monitor while the vehicle ismoving. Make sure the parking brake isfirmly applied.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMLIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations forRearView Monitor. Failure to operate thevehicle in accordance with these systemlimitations could result in serious injury ordeath.

● The system cannot completely elimi-nate blind spots and may not show ev-ery object.

● Underneath the bumper and the cornerareas of the bumper cannot be viewedon the RearView Monitor because of itsmonitoring range limitation. The systemwill not show small objects below thebumper, and may not show objectsclose to the bumper or on the ground.

● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-tor differ from actual distance becausea wide-angle lens is used.

● Objects in the RearView Monitor willappear visually opposite compared towhen viewed in the rearview and out-side mirrors.

● Use the displayed lines as a reference.The lines are highly affected by thenumber of occupants, fuel level, vehicleposition, road conditions and roadgrade.

● Make sure that the trunk is securelyclosed when backing up.

● Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled above the license plate.

Models with navigation

LHA3679




● When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing wa-ter condensation on the lens, a mal-function, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-function or cause damage resulting in afire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do notrepresent a system malfunction:

● When the temperature is extremely high orlow, the screen may not clearly display ob-jects.

● When strong light directly shines on thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected lightfrom the bumper.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight.

● The colors of objects on the RearViewMoni-tor may differ somewhat from the actualcolor of objects.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark environment.

● There may be a delay when switching be-tween views.

● If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the cam-era, the RearView Monitor may not displayobjects clearly. Clean the camera.

● Do not use wax on the camera lens.Wipe offany wax with a clean cloth dampened with adiluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with adry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinnerto clean the camera. This will causediscoloration.

● Do not damage the camera as themoni-tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

�1 , the RearView Monitor may not display ob-jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with acloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaningagent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

LHA4183




Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventslides.

Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move

the dial toward the to open the vents or

toward the to close them.

LHA4096

VENTS




1. Fan speed control dial/ system OFF dial/air conditioning (A/C) button

2. Air flow control buttons3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C

button4. Air recirculation button

5. Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defogger switch

6. Front windshield defogger button

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowouldnormally require the assistance of othersalone in your vehicle. Pets should also notbe left alone. They could accidentally in-jure themselves or others through inad-vertent operation of the vehicle. Also, onhot, sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possibly fatalinjuries to people or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

NOTE:

● Odors from inside and outside the vehiclecan build up in the air conditioner unit. Odorcan enter the passenger compartmentthrough the vents.

● When parking, set the heater and air condi-tioner controls to turn off air recirculation toallow fresh air into the passenger compart-ment. This should help reduce odors insidethe vehicle.

LHA2243

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)




CONTROLSFan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off,and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttonsThe air flow control buttons allow you to selectthe air flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defogger outletsand foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defoggeroutlets.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the ON position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

The air recirculation function does not operate

when in the or air flow modes.

OFF position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the OFF position for normal heater or airconditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position and press the buttonto turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air

conditioner, press the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defogger switch

For additional information about the defoggerswitch, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror(if so equipped) defogger switch” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defog out-lets and the side vent outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desiredposition.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the side andcenter vents.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.






4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

DefoggingThis mode directs the air to the defog outlets todefog the windows.

1. Press the front windshield defog

button .



● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to thehighest setting and the temperature controlto the full HOT position.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on if the out-side temperature is more than 2°C (36°F).This dehumidifies the air which helps defog

the windshield. The mode automati-cally turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.The recirculation mode cannot be activated

in the position.

Bi-level heatingThe bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.





Heating and defoggingThismode heats the interior and defogs thewind-shield.





● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on if the out-side temperature is more than 2°C (36°F).The indicator light on the A/C button willremain ON. This dehumidifies the air which

helps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position, and press the buttonto activate the air conditioner. When the air con-ditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying func-tions are added to the heater operation.The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.




CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.




4. Press the A/C button. The indicator lightcomes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, press the button to

the ON position. Be sure to return theto the OFF position for normal cooling. MAXA/C may be used for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.




4. Press the A/C button. The indicator lightcomes on.


Dehumidified defoggingThis mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.

1. Press the front windshield defog but-ton.


● When the or are selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on (theindicator light may or may not illuminate) ifthe outside temperature is more than 2°C(36°F). This dehumidifies the air which helps

defog the windshield. The mode au-tomatically turns off, allowing outside air tobe drawn into the passenger compartmentto further improve the defogging perfor-mance.

● The air conditioner is always on inmode, regardless of whether the indicatorlight is on or off.


Operating tips

● Keep the windows and moonroof closedwhile the air conditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min-utes with the windows open to vent hot airfrom the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. For additionalinformation, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.




AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defogging. The air recirculationbutton should always be in the OFF posi-tion for heating and defogging.

LHA4097




LHA4098 LHA4099




LHA4100 LHA4101




The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. For additional information, refer to “Airconditioner system refrigerant and oil recommen-dations” in the “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerto service your “environmentally friendly” air con-ditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrig-erant under high pressure. To avoid per-sonal injury, any air conditioner serviceshould be done only by an experiencedtechnician with proper equipment.

RADIO

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-

tion, press the (power) or ON-OFF buttonto turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio withthe engine not running, the ignition should beplaced in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehiclemay influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 40 –48 km (25 – 30 mi), with monaural (single chan-nel) FM having slightly more range than stereoFM. External influences may sometimes interferewith FM station reception even if the FM station iswithin 40 km (25 mi). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow aline-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the samecharacteristics as light. For example, they willreflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM




Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter), static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 12 cm (4.7 in)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

LHA0099




● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

1. MP3 or WMA file not supported → “UN-PLAYABLE TRACK”→ Go to next track

2. DRM Protected Files

3. CD ROM→ “No Audio Track”→ Eject discand go to the last mode

4. TEMP/MECH ERROR→ “PRESS EJECT”

5. READ/FOCUS ERROR→ “CHECK DISC”

CHECK DISC

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio withvirtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● WMA—WindowsMedia Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Micro-soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.




● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, andwritingmore than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, encoding bitrate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-mation is displayed on the Artist/song titleline on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks in the UnitedStates of America and other countries of Micro-soft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMAfiles is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078




Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*201: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.




Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters forfolder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, therewill be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.




USB (Universal Serial Bus)Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate theUSB device while driving. Doing so can bea distraction. If distracted you could losecontrol of your vehicle and cause an acci-dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

● Do not force the USB device into theUSB port. Inserting the USB devicetilted or up-side-down into the port maydamage the port. Make sure that theUSB device is connected correctly intothe USB port.

● Do not grab the USB port cover (if soequipped) when pulling the USB deviceout of the port. This could damage theport and the cover.

● Do not leave the USB cable in a placewhere it can be pulled unintentionally.Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.USB devices should be purchased separately asnecessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB de-vices. To format a USB device, use a personalcomputer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the frontseats plays only sound without images for regu-latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB memory de-vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. SomeUSB devices may not be supported by this sys-tem.

● Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-rectly.

● Some characters used in other languages(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appearproperly in the display. Using English lan-guage characters with a USB device is rec-ommended.

General notes for USB use:

● Refer to your device manufacturer’s ownerinformation regarding the proper use andcare of the device.

Notes for iPod® use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

● Improperly plugging in the iPod®may causea checkmark to be displayed on and off(flickering). Always make sure that theiPod® is connected properly.

● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remainin fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-nected during a seek operation. In this case,please manually reset the iPod®.

● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon-nected during a seek operation.

● An incorrect song title may appear when thePlay Mode is changed while using an iPod®nano (2nd Generation).

● Audiobooks may not play in the same orderas they appear on an iPod®.

● Large video files cause slow responses in aniPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-mentarily black out, but will soon recover.

● If an iPod® automatically selects large videofiles while in the shuffle mode, the vehiclecenter display may momentarily black out,but will soon recover.




Bluetooth® streaming audio

● Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not berecognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

● It is necessary to set up the wireless con-nection between a compatible Bluetooth®audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®module before using the Bluetooth® audio.

● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® au-dio will vary depending on the devices. Makesure how to operate your audio device be-fore using it with this system.

● The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped un-der the following conditions:

● Receiving a call on the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System.

● Checking the connection to the hands-free phone.

● Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device inan area surrounded bymetal or far away fromthe in-vehicle Bluetooth®module to preventtone quality degradation and wireless con-nection disruption.

● While an audio device is connected throughthe Bluetooth® wireless connection, thebattery power of the device may dischargequicker than usual.

● This system supports the Bluetooth® AudioDistribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Panasonic and Bosch.




FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if soequipped)

1. CD eject button

2. FM•AM button

3. CD insert slot

4. Display screen

5. SCAN button

6. SEEK / TRACK button

7. iPod MENU button

8. BACK button

9. TUNE/FOLDER knob / ENTER/SETTINGbutton

10. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

11. RDM button

12. RPT button

13. VOL (volume) control knob/ (power)button

14. DISP button

15. MEDIA button

16. CD buttonFor additional information on all operation pre-cautions, refer to “Audio operation precautions”in this section.

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume) con-

trol knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) buttonwhile the system is off to call up the mode (radio,CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio USB or iPod®) thatwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off.

LHA3026




To turn the system off, press the (power)button.Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume. When this feature is active, theaudio volume changes as the driving speedchanges.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show theSettings screen on the display. Turn theTUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the options andthen press the ENTER/SETTING button to makea selection.

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed ofthe vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume in-creases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 providesno additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock Allows user to set time manually.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select the item toadjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to themain audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.




Clock Set


2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to selectCLOCK.


4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select “settime”.


6. Rotate the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjusthours.


8. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust min-utes.


10. Press the BACK button to finish.

iPod MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® opera-tions. For additional information, refer to “iPod®player operation without Navigation System” inthis section.

DISP (display) button

Press the DISP (display) button while a CD isplaying to change the text shown in the audiodisplay as follows:

For CDs:

Running Time→ Album Title:→ Artist Name:→Song Title

For MP3 CDs:

Running Time → Folder Title: → Album Title: →Artist Name:→ Song Title:

If the text information is too long to fully be dis-played on the screen; press and hold the DISPbutton for longer than 1.5 seconds to scrollthrough the rest of the text.

Press the DISP (display) button while the radio isplaying to toggle the audio display between sta-tion number and RDS.

MEDIA button

Press the MEDIA button to toggle between dif-ferent media options connected to the system.

BACK button

Press the BACK button to return to theprevious menu screen.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band asfollows:

AM→ FM1→ FM2→ AM

If another audio source is playing when theFM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-ing will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will begin playing.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or rightfor manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK button or TRACKbutton to tune from low to high or high to lowfrequencies and to stop at the next broadcastingstation.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appearon the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this 5 secondperiod will stop SCAN tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCANbutton isnot pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuningmoves to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelvestations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1,six for FM2).




1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2using the FM·AM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until the preset number is updated on thedisplay and the sound is briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain textmay be displayed on the screen if the CD hasbeen encoded with text information. Depending

on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-played.

The track number and the total number of tracksin the current folder or on the current disc aredisplayed on the screen as well.

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK button orTRACK button for 1.5 seconds while the com-pact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward thetrack being played. The compact disc plays at anincreased speed while reversing or fast forward-ing. When the button is released, the compactdisc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button

Press the SEEK button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press the SEEKbutton several times to skip backward severaltracks.

Press the TRACK button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the TRACK button several times toskip forward several tracks. If the last track on aCD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played.

If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD isskipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-ing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to changefolders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back afolder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead afolder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat→ 1 Track Repeat→ OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed onthe screen unless no pattern is applied.




RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random→ 1 Folder Random→ OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will beplayed randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folderwill be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. Theindicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed onthe screen unless no pattern is applied.

EJECT button

When the EJECT button is pressed with acompact disc loaded, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

When the EJECT button is pressed twicewith a compact disc loaded, the compact discwill be ejected further for easier CD removal. Ifthe disc is not removed within 20 seconds, thedisc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information about the iPod® playeravailable with this system, refer to “iPod® playeroperation without Navigation System” in this sec-tion.

For additional information about the USB Con-nection port available with this system, refer to“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port(models without Navigation System)” in this sec-tion.

For additional information about the Bluetooth®audio interface available with this system, refer to“Bluetooth® streaming audio without NavigationSystem” in this section.




FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if soequipped)

1. CD eject button

2. FM-AM button

3. AUX button

4. CD insert slot

5. BACK button

6. TUNE knob, ENTER/AUDIO button

7. Display screen

8. (power) button / VOL (volume) con-trol knob

9. Backward seek button and for-ward seek button

10. CD button

11. XM button (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” in this section.


ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) controlknob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the ON-OFF button while thesystem is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was play-ing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume. When this feature is active, theaudio volume changes as the driving speedchanges.

LHA2500




Audio settings


2. Touch the “Audio” key.

Use the touch-screen to adjust the followingitems to the desired setting.

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sensitive Vol. Controls the level to which the volume is adjusted as the vehicle’s driving speed changes. Choose a setting or choose “0” todisable the feature entirely.

AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are, Low,Medium and High.

Bass, treble, balance, and fade settings can also be accessed by turning the TUNE knob until AUDIO is highlighted and then pressing the ENTER/AUDIObutton.




FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band asfollows:

AM→ FM1→ FM2→ AM

If another audio source is playing when theFM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-ing will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will begin playing.

Tuning with the touch-screen

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tunedusing the touch-screen. To bring up the visualtuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower rightcorner of the screen. A screen appears with a barrunning from low frequencies on the left to highfrequencies on the right. Touch the screen at thelocation of the frequency you wish to tune and thestation will change to that frequency. To return tothe regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”key.

Tuning with the TUNE knob

The radio can also be manually tuned using theTUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn theTUNE knob to the left for lower frequencies or tothe right for higher frequencies.

SEEK tuning

When in FM or AM mode, press the SEEK

button or TRACK button to tune from lowto high or high to low frequencies and to stop atthe next broadcasting station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (press7–12 key for more available presets) and sixstations can be set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band FM, and AM usingthe FM·AM select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual orseek tuning. Press and hold any of the de-sired station memory keys (1–12) until abeep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other keys can be set in the same manner.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio willautomatically be turned off and the compact discwill start to play.




CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item

CD/MP3 display modeWhile listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text isbeing used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:

Random/MixTouch the “Random” key or “Mix” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-ing “Random” or “Mix” alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display.To cancel Random/Mix mode, touch the “Random” or “Mix” key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on thedisplay. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted

Browse Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to beginplaying that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Fol-low the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.




SEEK (Reverse or Fast

Forward) buttons

Press and hold the seek buttons orfor 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playingto reverse or fast forward the track being played.The compact disc plays at an increased speedwhile reversing or fast forwarding. When the but-ton is released, the compact disc returns to nor-mal play speed.

SEEK buttons

Press the SEEK button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-ning of the current track. Press the SEEK

button several times to skip backward sev-eral tracks.

Press the SEEK button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the SEEK button several times toskip forward several tracks. If the last track on aCD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played.If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD isskipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

AUX button

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-dard analog audio input such as from a portablecassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptopcomputer. Press the AUX button to play a com-patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.

CD EJECT button

When the CD eject button is pressed witha compact disc loaded, the compact disc willeject and the last source will be played.If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, thedisc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information about the iPod® playeravailable with this system, refer to “iPod® playeroperation with Navigation System” in this section.

For additional information about the USB (Uni-versal Serial Bus) Connection Port available withthis system, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus)Connection Port (models with Navigation Sys-tem)” in this section.

For additional information about the Bluetooth®audio interface available with this system, refer to“Bluetooth® streaming audio with NavigationSystem” in this section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)CONNECTION PORT (modelswithout Navigation System) (if soequipped)

Connecting a device to the USBconnection port

WARNING


LHA4001




CAUTION




For additional information, refer to your devicemanufacturer’s owner information regarding theproper use and care of the device.

The USB Connection port �1 is located in thecenter console. Insert the USB device into theconnection port.

When a compatible storage device is pluggedinto the connection port, compatible audio fileson the storage device can be played through thevehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

MEDIA button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition and press the MEDIA button to switch tothe USB input mode. If another audio source isplaying and a USB memory device is inserted,press the MEDIA button until the center displaychanges to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, press the (power)button to restart the USB memory.

Play information

Information about the audio files being playedcan be displayed on the display screen of thevehicle’s audio system. Depending on how theaudio files are encoded, information such asFolder, Song and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total tracks inthe folder are displayed on the screen as well.

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons

Press and hold the or SEEK/TRACKbuttons for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on theUSB device is playing to reverse or fast forwardthe track being played. The track plays at anincreased speed while reversing or fast forward-

ing. When the button is released, the audio filereturns to normal play speed.

SEEK / TRACK buttons

Press the backward seek button while anaudio file on the USBdevice is playing to return tothe beginning of the current track. Press

the backward seek button several times toskip backward several tracks.

Press the forward seek button while anaudio file on the USB device is playing to ad-

vance one track. Press the forward seekbutton several times to skip forward severaltracks. If the last track in a folder on the USBdevice is skipped, the first track of the next folderis played.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while an audiofile on the USB device is playing, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

All Random→ 1 Folder Random→ OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will beplayed randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folderwill be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. Theindicator on the display will turn off.




The current play pattern of the USB device isdisplayed on the screen unless no pattern isapplied.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while an audiofile on the USB device is playing, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

1 Folder Repeat→ 1 Track Repeat→ OFF


1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device isdisplayed on the screen unless no pattern isapplied.

TUNE/FOLDER knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files on theUSB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob tochange folders. Turn the knob to the left to skipback a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skipahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audiofiles on the USB device, turning theTUNE/FOLDER knob in either direction will re-turn to the first track on the USB device.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)CONNECTION PORT (models withNavigation System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USBconnection port

WARNING


CAUTION





The USB Connection port �1 is located in thecenter console. Insert the USB device into theconnection port.

When a compatible storage device is pluggedinto the connection port, compatible audio fileson the storage device can be played through thevehicle’s audio system.

LHA4001




Audio file operation

AUX button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition and press the AUX button to switch tothe USB input mode. If another audio source isplaying and a USB memory device is inserted,press the AUX button until the center displaychanges to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USBmemory was playing, press the ON-OFF buttonto restart the USB memory.

Play information

Information about the audio files being played isshown on the display screen of the vehicle’saudio system. Touch “Browse” to display the listof folders and files on the USB device. Touch thename of a song on the screen to begin playingthat song.

SEEK buttons

Press the SEEK button or to skipbackward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK button orfor 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverseor fast forward the track being played. The trackplays at an increased speed while reversing orfast forwarding. When the button is released, thetrack returns to normal play speed.

Random and repeat play mode

While files on a USB device are playing, the playpattern can be altered so that songs are repeatedor played randomly.

RandomTouch the “Random” key to apply a random playpattern to the USB device. When the random

mode is active, the icon is displayed to theleft of the song title or album name to denotewhich random pattern is applied. To cancel Ran-dom mode, touch the “Random” key until

no icon is displayed.RepeatTouch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat playpattern to the USB device. When the repeat

mode is active, the icon is displayed to theleft of the song title or album name to denotewhich repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat

mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no iconis displayed.

LHA4006




iPod®* PLAYER OPERATIONWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (ifso equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING


CAUTION





To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that theiPod® can be controlled with the audio systemcontrols and display screen, use the USB Con-nection port �1 located on the center consolenear the parking brake. Connect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod® and theUSB end of the cable to the USB connection porton the vehicle. If your iPod® supports chargingvia a USB connection, its battery will be chargedwhile connected to the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® canonly be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-move the USB end of the cable from the USBconnection port on the vehicle, then remove thecable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

● iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmwareversion 1.3.0 or later)



● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-sion 1.3.1 or later)

● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-sion 1.1.3 or later)

● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-sion 1.1.3 or later)

● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-sion 1.0.4 or later)

LHA4001





● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-sion 1.1 or later)

● iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmwareversion 4.2.1 or later)

● iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware ver-sion 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 requiredfor smartphone integration)

● iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware ver-sion 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 requiredfor smartphone integration)

● iPhone®3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphoneintegration)

● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphoneintegration)

● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphoneintegration)

● iPhone®5 (firmware version 5.1 or later)(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphoneintegration)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated tothe version indicated above.

iPod® main operationPlace the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition. Then, press the MEDIA or iPod MENUbutton repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.

If the audio system is turned off while the iPod® isplaying, the iPod® plays when the audio systemis turned back on.

If the audio system is off, pressing the MEDIA oriPodMENU button turns the audio system on andplays the iPod®.

If the audio system is on, the audio system auto-matically begins playing tracks from the iPod®when it is plugged into the connection port.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

Press the or SEEK/TRACK buttonto skip backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the orSEEK/TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while atrack is playing to reverse or fast forward the trackbeing played. The track plays at an increasedspeed while reversing or fast forwarding. Whenthe button is released, the track returns to normalplay speed.

RPT (REPEAT)

When the RPT button is pressed while a track isbeing played, the play pattern can be changed asfollows:

Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →Repeat Off


All Repeat: all songs in the current list are re-peated.

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.

RDM (RANDOM)

When the RDM button is pressed while a track isbeing played, the play pattern can be changed asfollows:

Shuffle Off→ Track Shuffle→ Album Shuffle→Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will beplayed randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list willbe played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.




BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it re-turns to the previous menu.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM (if soequipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING


CAUTION





To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that theiPod® can be controlled with the audio systemcontrols and display screen, use the USB con-nection port �1 located in the center console.Connect the iPod®-specific end of the cable tothe iPod® and the USB end of the cable to theUSB connection port on the vehicle. If youriPod® supports charging via a USB connection,its battery will be charged while connected to thevehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition.

LHA4001




While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® canonly be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-move the USB end of the cable from the USBconnection port on the vehicle, then remove thecable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

● iPod®Classic 5th generation (firmware ver-sion 1.3.0 or later)



● iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware ver-sion 4.2.1 or later)*

● iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware ver-sion 5.1 or later)

● iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware ver-sion 5.1 or later)

● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-sion 1.3.1 or later)

● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-sion 1.1.3 or later)

● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-sion 1.1.3 or later)



● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-sion 1.1 or later)

● iPhone®3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)

● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be fullyfunctional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated tothe version indicated above.

iPod® main operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition. Press the AUX button repeatedly toswitch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®was playing, pressing the ON-OFF button willstart the iPod®.

AUX button

When the AUX button is pressed with the systemoff and the iPod® connected, the systemwill turnon. If another audio source is playing and theiPod® is connected, press the AUX button re-peatedly until the center display changes to theiPod® mode.

LHA4007




Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown on thevehicle’s audio system display screen is similar tothe iPod® interface. Use the

touch-screen, BACK button or the TUNEknob to navigate the menus on the screen.When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” keyto bring up the iPod® interface.

Depending on the iPod® model, the followingitems may be available on the menu list screen.For additional information, refer to the iPod®Owner’s Manual.

● Playlists

● Artists

● Albums

● Genres

● Songs

● Composers

● Audiobooks

● Podcasts

Shuffle and repeat play mode

While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern canbe altered so that songs are repeated or playedrandomly.

ShuffleTouch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random playpattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle mode isactive, the text is highlighted. To cancel Shufflemode, touch the “Shuffle” key again until the textis no longer highlighted.

RepeatTouch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat playpattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode isactive, the text is highlighted. To cancel Repeatmode, touch the “Repeat” key again until the textis no longer highlighted.

SEEK buttons

Press the SEEK button or to skipbackward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK button orfor 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverseor fast forward the track being played. The trackplays at an increased speed while reversing orfast forwarding. When the button is released, thetrack returns to normal play speed.

LHA2907




Tuning menus

While navigating long lists of artists, albums orsongs in the music menu, it is possible to scrollthe list by the first character in the name. Toactivate character indexing, touch the “A-Z”key inthe upper right corner of the screen. Turn theTUNE knob to choose the number or letter tojump to in the list and then press theENTER/AUDIO button.

If no character is selected after thirty seconds,the display returns to normal.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIOWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM(ifso equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-vice that is capable of playing audio files, thedevice can be connected to the vehicle’s audiosystem so that the audio files on the device playthrough the vehicle’s speakers. For additionalinformation, refer to “FM/AM radio with compactdisc (CD) player (Type A),” in this section.

NOTE:

For additional information, refer to the Cel-lular Phone Owner’s Manual.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to thevehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button. The system an-nounces the available commands.

2. Select “Connect Phone”. The system ac-knowledges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

3. Select “Add Phone”. The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiateconnecting from the phone handset. Theconnecting procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phonemodel. For additional information, refer tothe cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

4. When prompted for a PIN code, enter“1234” from the handset. The PIN code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.


To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, pressthe MEDIA button repeatedly until theBluetooth® audio mode is displayed on thescreen.

You can use the vehicle audio controls or theBluetooth® device’s controls to play, pause, skipor reverse tracks.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIOWITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if soequipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-vice that is capable of playing audio files, thedevice can be connected to the vehicle’s audiosystem so that the audio files on the device playthrough the vehicle’s speakers. For additionalinformation, refer to “FM/AM Radio with compactdisc (CD) player (Type B),” in this section.

LHA2279




Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to thevehicle, follow the procedure below:


2. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

3. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

4. The system acknowledges the commandand asks you to initiate connecting from thephone handset. The connecting procedureof the cellular phone varies according toeach cellular phone model. For additionalinformation, refer to the cellular phone Own-er’s Manual.


To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, pressthe AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®audio mode is displayed on the screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-played on the screen.

LHA4014 LHA2313




CD CARE AND CLEANING

● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend thedisc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL1. SOURCE switch

2. Tunning switch / ENTER button

3. Volume control switch

SOURCE switchPush the source select switch to change themode in the following sequence:

AM→ FM1→ FM2→→ CD*→ USB/iPod®*→Bluetooth® Audio*→ AUX*→ AM.

* These modes are only available when compat-ible media storage is inserted into the device orconnected to the system.

LHA0049 LHA4000




Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch/ENTER

button

For most audio sources, tilting the tuning switchup/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides adifferent function than a tilting up/down for lessthan 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the preset station.

● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toseek up or down to the next station.

iPod®:

● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the track number.

● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toreverse or fast forward the current song.

CD:


● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the folder number (ifplaying compressed audio files).

● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds tochange the playing disc up or down (com-pact disc changer, if so equipped).

USB:


● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the folder number.

Bluetooth® Audio:

● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toskip ahead or back to the next song.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rearwindow.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear window glass or attach any metalparts to it. This may cause poor recep-tion or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.




When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour vehicle, be sure to observe the followingprecautions; otherwise, the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular phone should not be used forany purpose while driving so full atten-tion may be given to vehicle operation.Some jurisdictions prohibit the use ofcellular phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode is highlyrecommended. Exercise extreme cau-tion at all times so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 20 cm(8 in) away from the electronic controlsystem harnesses. Do not route the an-tenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For additional information, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attentionmaybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)




Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connectingprocedure is required. Your phone is automaticallyconnected with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in theON position withthe previously connected cellular phone turned onand carried in the vehicle.

You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acompatible cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module before using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System.

● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

LHA4181




● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth® wireless connection, thebattery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● For additional information, refer to the cellu-lar phone’s Owner’s Manual regarding thetelephone charges, cellular phone antennaand body, etc.

● For additional information, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer orvisit a NISSAN owner portal for details re-garding phone compatibility.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Panasonic.

USING THE SYSTEMThe system allows hands-free operation of theBluetooth® Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.




CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to selectan item on the phone menuscreen or answer an incomingcall.

PHONE/END

Press the button to go backwhen in a phone menu screen.

Tuning switch (left side)

Tilt the tuning switch up or downto select items on the screen.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-formedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If thevehicle starts moving during the procedure,the procedure will be cancelled.

LHA4025 LHA2775




To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure


2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select“Bluetooth” and then press theENTER/SETTING button.

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on.

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off.

Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and complete theconnection process.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previ-ous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.




Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system, press

the button on the steering wheel. The sys-tem will automatically begin searching for a com-patible phone. If the system detects a compatiblephone a message with a PIN appears on thescreen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enterthe PIN and complete the connection process.

MENU COMMANDSPress the button to bring up the phonecommand menu. The available options are:

● Call

● Phonebook

● Recent Calls

● Messaging (if so equipped)

● Select Phone

“Call”For additional information, refer to “Making a call”in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available under“Phonebook”:

● List NamesSelect this command to have the system listthe names in the phonebook one by onealphabetically. Select “Dial” to dial the num-ber of the current name or “Send Text” tosend a text message to that number. Select“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to movethrough the list alphabetically.

● Transfer EntryThis command can be used to transfer mul-tiple contacts at a time. To enable manualcontact transfer capability, set “PhonebookDownload” to “Off” in the Setting menu. Theability to transfer contacts via the OPPBluetooth® profile depends on your mobilephone. For additional information, refer toyour phone’s Owner’s Manual.

● Delete EntrySelect this command to delete an entry inthe phonebook. The system lists the namesin the phonebook. Use the manual controlsto delete an entry or move to the next entry.

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available under“Recent Calls”:

● Incoming CallsSelect this command to list the last fiveincoming calls to the vehicle. If the call isfrom an entry in the phonebook, the namewill be displayed. Otherwise, the phonenumber of the incoming call will be dis-played.Select “Dial” to call the number or “SendText” to send a text message to that number.Select “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” tomove through the list of incoming calls.

● Missed CallsSelect this command to list the last fivemissed calls to the vehicle. If the call is froman entry in the phonebook, the name will bedisplayed. Otherwise, the phone number ofthe missed call will be displayed.Select “Dial” to call the number or “SendText” to send a text message to that number.Select “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” tomove through the list of missed calls.




● Outgoing CallsSelect this command to list the last fiveoutgoing calls from the vehicle. If the callwas to an entry in the phonebook, the namewill be displayed. Otherwise, the phonenumber of the outgoing call will be dis-played.Select “Dial” to call the number or “SendText” to send a text message to that number.Select “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” tomove through the list of outgoing calls.

● RedialSelect this command to call the last numberdialed.

● Call BackSelect this command to call the number ofthe last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Text messag-ing” in this section.

“Select Phone”

Select this command to select a phone to usefrom a list of those phones connected to thevehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to thevehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the button.

2. Select “Call”.

3. Select one of the available commands tocontinue:

● “List Names”– Select this command to havethe system list the names in the phonebookone by one alphabetically. Select “Dial” todial the number of the current name or “SendText” to send a text message to that number.Select “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” tomove through the list alphabetically.

● “Redial” – Select this command to dial thenumber of the last outgoing call. The systemwill display “Redialing <name/number>”.The name of the phonebook entry will bedisplayed if it available, otherwise the num-ber being redialed will be displayed.

● “Call Back” – Select this command to dialthe number of the last incoming call. Thesystem will display “Calling back<name/number>”. The name of the phone-book entry will be displayed if it available,otherwise the number being called back willbe displayed.

RECEIVING A CALLWhen a call is received by the phone connectedto the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem, the call information is displayed on eitherthe vehicle information display or both the vehicleinformation display and he control panel display.

Press the button to accept the call. Press

the button to reject the call.

DURING A CALLWhile a call is active, press the button toaccess additional options. Select one of the fol-lowing commands:

● Select “Mute On” or “Mute Off” to mute orunmute the system.

● Select “Transfer Call” to transfer the call tothe handset. To transfer the call back fromthe handset to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, press the button andconfirm when prompted.




If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waitingfunctionality. If a call is received while another callis already active, a message will be displayed on

the screen. Press the button to hold theactive call and switch to the second call. Press

the button to reject the second call.While the second call is active, pressing

the button will allow the same commandsthat available during any call as well as two addi-tional commands:

● “Switch Call” – Select this command to holdthe second call and switch back to the origi-nal call.

● “End Other Call” – Select this command tostay with the second call and end the originalcall.

Press the button to accept the call. Press

the button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALLTo end an active call, press the button.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrictthe use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check lo-cal regulations before using thefeature.

● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrictthe use of some of the applications andfeatures, such as social networking andtexting. Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

● Use the text messaging feature afterstopping your vehicle in a safe location.If you have to use the feature whiledriving, exercise extreme caution at alltimes so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while using the textmessaging feature, pull off the road to asafe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permis-sion to enable text messaging. Check thephone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.For some phones, you may need to enable‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®menu for text messages to appear on theheadunit. For additional information, referto the phone’s Owner’s Manual.

NOTE:

Text message integration requires that thephone support MAP (Message Access Pro-file) for both receiving and sending textmessages. Some phones may not supportall text messaging features. Consult aNISSAN dealer or visit a NISSAN ownerportal for details regarding phone compat-ibility. For additional information, refer tothe phone’s Owner’s Manual.

The system allows for the sending and receivingof text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:


2. Select “Messaging”

3. Select “Send Text”.




4. The system will provide a list of availablecommands in order to determine the recipi-ent of the text message. Choose from thefollowing:

● (a name)

● Number

● Incoming Calls

● Outgoing Calls

● Missed Calls

For additional information, refer to “Menucommands” in this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the systemprompts for which message to send. Fivepredefined messages are available as wellas three custom messages. To choose oneof the predefined messages, select one ofthe following:

● “Driving, can’t text”

● “Call me”

● “On my way”

● “Running late”

● “Okay”

To send one of the custommessages, select“Custom Message”. If more than one cus-tom message is stored, the system willprompt for the number of the desired cus-tom message. For additional information, re-fer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

Reading a received text message:


2. Select “Messaging”.

3. Select “Read Text”.The text message, sender and delivery time areshown on the screen. Use the tuning switch onthe steering wheel to scroll through all text mes-sages if more than one are available. Press

the button to exit the text message screen.

Press the button to access the followingoptions for replying to the text message:

● Call BackSelect this command to call the sender ofthe text message using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System.

● Send TextSelect this command to send a text messageresponse to the sender of the text message.

● Read TextSelect this command to read the text mes-sage again.

● Previous TextSelect this command to move to the previ-ous text message (if available).

● Next TextSelect this command to move to the next textmessage (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if thevehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph).




BLUETOOTH® SETTINGSTo access and adjust the settings for theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:


2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select“Bluetooth” and then press theENTER/SETTINGS button:

● BluetoothSelect “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’sBluetooth® system on or off.

● Add Phone or DeviceFor additional information, refer to “Con-necting procedure” in this section.

● Delete Phone or DeviceSelect to delete a phone from the displayedlist. The system will ask to confirm beforedeleting the phone.

● Replace PhoneSelect to replace a phone from the displayedlist. When a selection is made, the systemwill ask to confirm before proceeding. Therecorded phonebook for the phone beingdeleted will be saved as long as the newphone’s phonebook is the same as the oldphone’s phonebook.

● Select Phone or DeviceSelect to connect to a previously connectedphone from the displayed list.

● Show Incoming CallsSelect “Driver Only” to have incoming callinformation displayed only in the vehicle in-formation display. Select “Both” to have in-coming call information displayed in both thevehicle information display and the centerdisplay screen.

● Phonebook DownloadSelect to turn on or off the automatic down-load of a connected phone’s phonebook.

● Text Message (if so equipped)Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s textmessaging feature. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this section.

LHA2775 LHA2274




● New Text Sound (if so equipped)Select to adjust the volume of the sound thatplays when a new text is received by a phoneconnected to the Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System. The setting all the way to theleft indicates that the new text sound will bemuted.

● Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)Select “Driver Only” to have incoming textmessages displayed only in the vehicle infor-mation display. Select “Both” to have incom-ing text messages displayed in both the ve-hicle information display and the centerdisplay screen. Select “None” to have nodisplay of incoming text messages.

● Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)Select to set a custom message that will beavailable with the standard options whensending a text message. To set a custommessage, send a text message to your ownphone number while the phone is connectedto the system. Three custom messages canbe set. Custom messages can only be setwhile the vehicle is stationary.

● Auto Reply (if so equipped)Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func-tion. When enabled, the vehicle will auto-matically send a predefined text message tothe sender when a text message is receivedwhile driving.

● Auto Reply Message (if so equipped)Select to choose the message that is sentwhen the Auto Reply function is enabled.Choose from “I’m Driving”or one of the threecustom messages stored in the system.

● Vehicle Signature On/Off (if so equipped)Select to choose whether or not the vehiclesignature is added to outgoing text mes-sages from the vehicle. This message can-not be changed or customized.

WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attentionmaybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)




Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connectingprocedure is required. Your phone is automaticallyconnected with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in theON position withthe previously connected cellular phone turned onand carried in the vehicle.

You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acompatible cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module before using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System.

● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

LHA4182




● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth® wireless connection, thebattery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● For additional information, refer to the cellu-lar phone’s Owner’s Manual regarding thetelephone charges, cellular phone antennaand body, etc.

● For additional information, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer orvisit a NISSAN owner portal for details re-garding phone compatibility.

REGULATORY INFORMATIONFCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Bosch.




CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

1. Press the MENU button on the controlpanel.


3. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

4. Initiate the connecting process from thehandset. The system will display the mes-sage: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on yourBluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayedon your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” tocomplete the connecting process.

For additional information, refer to theBluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

To access the vehicle phonebook:

1. Press the button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayedlist.

4. The number of the entry will be displayed onthe screen. Touch the number to initiate di-aling.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touch the“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of thescreen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose aletter or number and then press ENTER.The list will move to the first entry thatbegins with that number or letter.

MAKING A CALLTo make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button on the control panel.The “Phone” screen will appear on the dis-play.

2. Select one of the following options tomake acall:

● “Phonebook”: Select the name from an entrystored in the vehicle phonebook.

● “Call Lists”: Select the name from the in-coming, outgoing or missed.

● “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from thevehicle.

● “ ”: Input the phone number manuallyusing a keypad displayed on the screen. Foradditional information, refer to “How to usethe touch-screen” in this section.

RECEIVING A CALLWhen a call is placed to the connected phone,the display will change to phone mode.

To accept the incoming call, either:

● Press the button on the steeringwheel, or

● Touch the green phone icon on the screen.

LHA4014




To reject the incoming call, either:

● Press the button on the steeringwheel, or

● Touch the red phone icon on the screen.

DURING A CALLWhile a call is active, the following options areavailable on the screen:

● “Handset”Select this option to switch control of thephone call over to the handset.

● “Mute Mic.”Select this option to mute the microphone.Select again to unmute the microphone.

● Phone ( ) iconSelect to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALLTo end a phone call, select the red phone ( )

icon on the screen or press the button onthe steering wheel.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrictthe use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check lo-cal regulations before using thefeature.

● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrictthe use of some of the applications andfeatures, such as social networking andtexting. Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

● Use the text messaging feature afterstopping your vehicle in a safe location.If you have to use the feature whiledriving, exercise extreme caution at alltimes so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while using the textmessaging feature, pull off the road to asafe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permis-sion to enable text messaging. Check thephone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.For some phones, you may need to enable‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®menu for text messages to appear on theheadunit. For additional information, referto the phone’s Owner’s Manual.

NOTE:

Text message integration requires that thephone support MAP (Message Access Pro-file) for both receiving and sending textmessages. Some phones may not supportall text messaging features. Consult aNISSAN dealer or visit a NISSAN ownerportal for details regarding phone compat-ibility. For additional information, refer tothe phone’s Owner’s Manual.

The system allows for the sending and receivingof text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Select “Phone” after the tone.

3. Select “Send Text” after the tone.




4. The system will provide a list of availablecommands in order to determine the recipi-ent of the text message. Choose from thefollowing:

● To (a name)

● Enter Number

● Missed Calls

● Incoming Calls

● Outgoing Calls

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the systemprompts for which message to send. Ninepredefined messages are available as wellas three custom messages. To choose oneof the predefined messages, speak one ofthe following after the tone:

● “Driving, can’t text”

● “Call me”

● “On my way”

● “Running late”

● “Okay”

● “Yes”

● “No”

● “Where are you?”

● “When?”

To send one of the custom messages, say“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-tom message is stored, the system willprompt for the number of the desired cus-tom message. For additional information, re-fer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Select “Phone” after the tone.

3. Select “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery time areshown on the screen. Use the tuning

switch to scroll through all text messages if

more than one are available. Press thebutton to exit the text message screen. Press

the button to access the following optionsfor replying to the text message:

● Call BackSpeak this command to call the sender ofthe text message using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System.

● Send TextSpeak this command to send a text messageresponse to the sender of the text message.

● Read TextSpeak this command to read the text mes-sage again.

● Previous TextSpeak this command to move to the previ-ous text message (if available).

● Next TextSpeak this command to move to the next textmessage (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if thevehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph).




BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:



Menu Item Result

Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone Settings” in this section.

Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Bluetooth Select to toggle the Bluetooth® on and off.

LHA2844




PHONE SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:



3. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjustthe following settings as desired:

● Sort Phonebook By:Select “First Name” or “Last Name” tochoose how phonebook entries are alpha-betically displayed on the screen.

● Use Phonebook from:Select “Handset” to use the phone’s phone-book. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook onthe SIM card. Select “Both” to use bothsources.

● Download Phonebook Now:Select to download the phonebook to thevehicle from the chosen source.

● Record Name for Phonebook Entry (if soequipped):Select to record a name for a phonebookentry for use with the Voice RecognitionSystem.

● Phone Notifications (if so equipped):Select “Driver” to have phone notificationsshown in the vehicle information display. Se-lect “Both” to have phone notificationsshown in both the vehicle information displayand the center display screen.

● Text Messaging (if so equipped):Select “On”or “Off” to activate or deactivatetext messaging feature. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Text Messaging” in this sec-tion.

● Show Incoming Text (if so equipped):Select “Driver” to have incoming text notifi-cations shown in the vehicle information dis-play. Select “Both” to have text notificationsshown in both the vehicle information displayand the center display screen. Select “Off”to turn off all text notifications.

● Auto Reply (if so equipped):Select “On” to have the system automati-cally reply to caller with a predetermined textmessage. Select “Off” to turn off auto replyfunction.

● Auto Reply Message (if so equipped):Select to indicate preferred message to beused when “Auto Reply” function is acti-vated.

● Use Vehicles’s Signature (if so equipped):Select “On” to have vehicle signature shownin outgoing text messages or “Off” to deac-tivate the function.

● Custom Text Messages (if so equipped):Select this option to select a custom mes-sage to edit. There are 4 customer messageslots available.




5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge. . . . . . . 5-10NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . 5-12

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17SPORT mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28



WARNING

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.


EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates,doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)closed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withone of these open, follow theseprecautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the trunk lid or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYSTThe three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving



WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequippedwith a Tire PressureMonitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck all four tires as soon as possible, andinflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s re-sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Starting and driving 5-3



Additional information:

● Since the spare tire is not equipped with theTPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

● The TPMSwill activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16mph (25 km/h).Also, this system may not detect a suddendrop in tire pressure (for example a flat tirewhile driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureof all your tires are adjusted. After the tiresare inflated to the recommended pressure,the vehicle must be driven at speeds above16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS andturn off the low tire pressure warning light.Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tirepressure.

● The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warningmessage is displayed in the odometer whenthe low tire pressure warning light is illumi-nated and low tire pressure is detected. The“Tire Pressure Low—AddAir”warningmes-sage turns off when the low tire pressurewarning light turns off. The low tire pressurewarning light remains illuminated until thetires are inflated to the recommendedCOLDtire pressure. The “Tire Pressure Low—AddAir”warning message is displayed each timethe ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-tion as long as the low tire pressure warninglight remains illuminated. For additional in-formation, refer to “Low tire pressure warn-ing light” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

● The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warningis not displayed if the low tire pressure warn-ing light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-function.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Do not reducethe tire pressure after driving because thetire pressure rises after driving. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates, checkthe tire pressure for all four tires.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (alsoreferred to as the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label) is located in thedriver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.




WARNING


● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur andmay lead to an accidentand could result in serious personal in-jury. Check the tire pressure for all fourtires. Adjust the tire pressure to therecommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light off. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. (For additional information,refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case ofemergency” section for changing a flattire.)

● Since the spare tire is not equippedwiththe TPMS, when a spare tire is mountedor a wheel is replaced, the TPMS willnot function and the low tire pressurewarning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute. The light will remainon after 1 minute. Have your tires re-placed and/or TPMS system reset assoon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may illuminatein the following cases.

● If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel andtire without TPMS.

● If the TPMS has been replaced and the IDhas not been registered.

● If the wheel is not originally specified byNISSAN.




AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control couldresult in a collision with other vehicles orobjects or cause the vehicle to roll over,particularly if the loss of control causes thevehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving whentired. Never drive when under the influence ofalcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-ness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined inthe “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual, and alsoinstruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, anunbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured orkilled than a person properly wearing aseat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheelsmay unintentionally leave the road surface. If thisoccurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-ing the procedure below. Please note that thisprocedure is only a general guide. The vehiclemust be driven as appropriate based on the con-ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-hicle to follow the road while vehicle speedis reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-hicle back onto the road surface until vehiclespeed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn thesteering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the roadsurface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-propriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return thevehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,road or traffic conditions, gradually slow thevehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occurif the tire is punctured or is damaged due tohitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure losscan also be caused by driving on under-inflatedtires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingand stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayspeeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-ing the correct air pressure and visually inspectthe tires for wear and damage. For additionalinformation, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or“blows-out” while driving, maintain control of thevehicle by following the procedure below. Pleasenote that this procedure is only a general guide.The vehicle must be driven as appropriate basedon the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.




WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.Losing control of the vehicle may cause acollision and result in personal injury.

● The vehicle generally moves or pulls inthe direction of the flat tire.

● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

● Do not rapidly release the acceleratorpedal.

● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe locationoff the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to graduallystop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andcontact a roadside emergency service tochange the tire. For additional information,refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That istrue for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)and illegal drugs too. Don’t drive if your ability tooperate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignitionswitch while driving the vehicle except inan emergency. (The engine will stop whenthe ignition switch is pushed three con-secutive times in quick succession or theignition switch is pushed and held formore than 2 seconds.) If the engine stopswhile the vehicle is being driven, thiscould lead to a crash and serious injury.

LSD2014

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH




When the ignition switch is pushed without de-pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch po-sition will illuminate as follows:

Push center

● Once to change to ACC.

● Two times to change to ON.

● Three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to theLOCK position when any door is either opened orclosed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch position cannot be switched to OFF untilthe shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) posi-tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switchposition will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFFposition.

The shift lever can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the brake pedal isdepressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,the push-button ignition switch cannot bemoved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation aredisplayed in the meter. For additional information,refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and au-dible reminders” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-charged or strong radio waves are present nearthe operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-tem’s operating range becomes narrower andmay not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,it is possible for anyone, even someonewho doesnot carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignitionswitch to start the engine.

LSD2089




The operating range of the engine start functionis inside of the vehicle�1 .

● The luggage area is not included in the op-erating range, but the Intelligent Key mayfunction.

● If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-ment panel, inside the glove box, storage binor door pocket, the Intelligent Key may notfunction.

● If the Intelligent Key is placed near the dooror window outside the vehicle, the IntelligentKey may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCHPOSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in thisposition.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it ispushed to the ACC position while carrying theIntelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door isopened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories,such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn theignition switch to the OFF position after a periodof time under the following conditions:

● all doors are closed.

● shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if anyof the following occur:

● any door is opened.

● shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) posi-tion.

● ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system andelectrical accessories.

ON position also has a battery saver feature thatwill turn the ignition switch to the OFF positionafter a period of time. This battery saver featurecan be activated/deactivated following the sameconditions at the ACC position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in ACC or ON position when theengine is not running for an extended pe-riod. This can discharge the battery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position whenthe engine is turned off using the ignition switch.No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situationwhile driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switchthree consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switchfor more than 2 seconds.




NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® isdischarged, or environmental conditions interferewith the Intelligent Key operation, start the engineaccording to the following procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the IntelligentKey as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

After Step 3 is performed, when the ignitionswitch is pushed without depressing thebrake pedal, the ignition switch position willchange to ACC.

4. Push the ignition switch while depressingthe brake pedal within ten seconds after thechime sounds. The engine will start.

NOTE:

● When the ignition switch is pushed to theACC or ON position or the engine is startedby the above procedure, the Intelligent Keybattery discharge indicator appears in thevehicle information display even when theIntelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This isnot a malfunction. To turn off the IntelligentKey battery discharge indicator, touch theignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.

● If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-cator appears, replace the battery as soonas possible. For additional information, referto “Battery Replacement” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

SSD0860




● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake and clutch fluid (if so equipped),and windshield-washer fluid as frequently aspossible, or at least whenever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust headrestraints/headrests.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-tion. For additional information, refer to“Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-tral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the shift levers is in either P orN.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-tion switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push andrelease the ignition switch while depressingthe brake pedal with the ignition switch inany position.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and whileholding, crank the engine. Release theaccelerator pedal when the engine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing theignition switch to LOCK. After crankingthe engine, release the accelerator pedal.Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by depressing thebrake pedal and pushing the push-buttonignition switch to start the engine. If theengine starts, but fails to run, repeat theabove procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, push the ignition switch to theOFF position and wait 10 seconds beforecranking again, otherwise the startercould be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-gine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutesbefore shutting it off. Starting and stoppingthe engine over a short period of time maymake the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever to theP (Park) position and push the ignitionswitch to the OFF position.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE




NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situationsthat can lead to potential battery dischargeand potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronicaccessories that consume battery powerwhen the engine is not running (Phone char-gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or onlydriven short distances. In these cases, thebattery may need to be charged to maintainbattery health.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).Always depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Never shift to either the P (Park) or R(Reverse) position while the vehicle ismoving forward and P (Park) or D(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-versing. This could cause an accident ordamage the transmission.

CAUTION

● Except in an emergency, do not shift tothe N (Neutral) position while driving.Coasting with the transmission in the N(Neutral) position may cause seriousdamage to the transmission.

● To avoid possible damage to your ve-hicle, when stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold the vehicle bydepressing the accelerator pedal. Thefoot brake should be used for thispurpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power and smoothoperation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE




NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-duced to protect the CVT if the enginespeed increases quickly when driving onslippery roads or while being tested onsome dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).Always depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Never shift to either the P (Park) or R(Reverse) position while the vehicle ismoving forward and P (Park) or D(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-versing. This could cause an accident ordamage the transmission.

CAUTION

● Except in an emergency, do not shift tothe N (Neutral) position while driving.Coasting with the transmission in the N(Neutral) position may cause seriousdamage to the transmission.

● To avoid possible damage to your ve-hicle, when stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold the vehicle bydepressing the accelerator pedal. Thefoot brake should be used for thispurpose.

1. After starting the engine, fully depress thefoot brake pedal before moving the shiftlever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift lever into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shiftingthe shift lever to the P (Park) position.

The CVT is designed so the foot brakepedal MUST be depressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) to any drive position whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-tions if the ignition switch is turned to theLOCK or OFF position.




To move the shift lever:

Push the button�A while depressing thebrake pedal

Push the button�A to shift

Shift without pushing button�A

ShiftingAfter starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) toany of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever isin any position while the engine is notrunning. Failure to do so could cause thevehicle to move unexpectedly or roll awayand result in serious personal injury orproperty damage.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when thevehicle is parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.The brake pedal must be depressed andthe shift lever button pushed in tomove theshift lever from N (Neutral) or any driveposition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then place the shift lever into the P (Park)position.

When it is hard to shift the shift lever from the P(Park) position to other positions, first check thatthe parking brake is applied, then release the footbrake pedal and depress the foot brake pedalagain.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theR (Reverse) position only when the vehicleis completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedalmust be depressed and the shift leverbutton pushed in to move the shift leverfrom P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive po-sition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low)

Use this position for maximum engine braking onsteep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopesand whenever approaching sharp bends. Do notuse the L (Low) position in any other circum-stances.

LSD2568


� REVIEW COPY—2016 Sentra (sni)Owners Manual—Israel (isr)03/11/16—blipari �


Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, theshift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)position even with the brake pedal depressedand the shift lever button pressed.

It will be necessary to jump start or have yourbattery charged. For additional information, referto “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual. Contact a NISSAN dealeror a professional towing service.

To move the shift lever, complete the followingprocedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mmscrewdriver, remove the shift lock releasecover.

● If available, a plastic trim tool can also beused.

4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) posi-tion while holding down the shift lock re-lease.

6. Push the ignition switch to the ON positionto unlock the steering wheel. Now the ve-hicle may be moved to the desired location.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),have the transmission checked as soon as pos-sible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot bemoved from theP (Park) position while the engine is run-ning and the brake pedal is depressed, thestop lights may not work. Malfunctioningstop lights could cause an accident injur-ing yourself and others.

LSD2569




Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the

shift lever in the D (Drive) position, thelight in the instrument panel illuminates. For addi-tional information, refer to “Overdrive OFF indica-tor light (CVT models)” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.Use the Overdrive OFF mode when you needimproved engine braking.

To turn off the Overdrive OFF mode, push the

O/D OFF switch again. The indicator lightwill turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when the shiftlever is shifted to any position other than D(Drive), the Overdrive OFF mode will be auto-matically turned off.

Accelerator downshift— in D (Drive) position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT willnot be shifted into the selected driving position.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. The MIL maycome on to indicate the fail-safe mode isactivated. For additional information, referto “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the“Instruments and controls” section of thismanual. This will occur even if all electricalcircuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and wait for 10 seconds. Thenplace the ignition switch back in the ONposition. The vehicle should return to itsnormal operating condition. If it does not

return to its normal operating condition,have the transmission checked and re-paired, if necessary. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.The reduced speed may be lower thanother traffic, which could increase thechance of a collision. Be especially carefulwhen driving. If necessary, pull to the sideof the road at a safe place and allow thetransmission to return to normal opera-tion, or have it repaired if necessary.

LSD2620




WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the shift lever in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.


To engage: Pull the lever up�A .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake leverslightly, push the button and lower com-pletely�B .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

Adjusts the throttle sensitivity and transmissionpoints to enhance performance. Press theSPORT switch on the instrument panel to acti-vate. The SPORT mode indicator light (on themeter) will illuminate. The SPORTmode indicatorlight will remain lit while the mode is active.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may bereduced.

LSD2197 LIC2417

PARKING BRAKE SPORT MODE SWITCH




The ECO mode helps to enhance the fueleconomy by controlling the throttle sensitivity andtransmission points.

To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO modeswitch. The ECO mode indicator light (on themeter) will remain lit while the mode is active.

To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO modeswitch again. The ECO mode indicator light (onthe meter) will turn off.

The ECO mode cannot be turned off while theaccelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECOmode switch is pushed to OFF. Release theaccelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode.

The ECO mode will turn off automatically if amalfunction occurs in the system.

Turn off the ECOmode, or depress the accelera-tor pedal fully when:

● driving with a heavy load of passengers orcargo in the vehicle

● driving on a steep uphill slope

● ECOmodemay affect air conditioner perfor-mance

NOTE:

Selecting this drivemodewill not necessar-ily improve fuel economy as many drivingfactors influence its effectiveness. PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

LIC2416 LSD2572

ECO MODE SWITCH CRUISE CONTROL




● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The CRUISE indica-tor light in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver. For additional information,refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights andaudible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

● If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, push thecruise control ON/OFF switch off and havethe system checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● The CRUISE indicator light may blink whenthe cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushedON while pushing the ACCEL/RES,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop-erly set the cruise control system, use thefollowing procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light inthe instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL switch, or

● Tap the brake pedal, or

● Push the ON/OFF switch off. The CRUISEindicator light in the instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled if:

● You depress the brake or clutch pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COASTswitch. The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

● The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one ofthe following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).




To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximumengine performance and ensurethe future reliability and economy of yournew vehicle. Failure to follow these rec-ommendations may result in shortenedengine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 RPM.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi(805 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended scheduled main-tenance.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.For additional information, refer to “Engineoil and oil filter recommendations” in the“Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY




WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftlever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:�A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:�B

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB:�C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS




Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Follow the information below if you need to towyour vehicle.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes usedwhen towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● DO NOT tow any continuously variabletransmission vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground (flat towing). do-ing soWILL DAMAGE internal transmis-sion parts due to lack of transmissionlubrication.

● For additional information, refer to“Towing recommended by NISSAN” inthe “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuouslyvariable transmission, an appropriate vehicledollyMUST be placed under the towed vehicle’sdrive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-turer’s recommendations when using their prod-uct.

TOWING A TRAILER TOWING YOUR VEHICLE




WARNING

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

● When the power steering warning lightilluminates with the engine running,there will be no power assist for thesteering. You will still have control ofthe vehicle, but the steering will beharder to operate. Have the powersteering system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

The power steering system is designed to pro-vide power assist while driving to operate thesteering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedlyor continuously while parking or driving at a verylow speed, the power assist for the steeringwheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-heating of the power steering system and protectit from getting damaged. While the power assistis reduced, steering wheel operation will becomeheavy.When the temperature of the power steer-ing system goes down, the power assist level willreturn to normal. Avoid repeating such steering

wheel operations that could cause the powersteering system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering wheel isoperated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-tion.

If the electric power steering warning light illumi-nates while the engine is running, it may indicatethe power steering system is not functioningproperly andmay need servicing. Have the powersteering system checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the electric power steering warning lightilluminates with the engine running, there will beno power assist for the steering, but you will stillhave control of the vehicle. At this time, greatersteering effort is required to operate the steeringwheel, especially in sharp turns and at lowspeeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-ing warning light” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM




WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever theeffect of the parking brake is weakened or when-ever the parking brake shoes and/ordrums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The ABS is a sophisticated device, but itcannot prevent accidents resulting fromcareless or dangerous driving tech-niques. It can helpmaintain vehicle con-trol during braking on slippery surfaces.Remember that stopping distances onslippery surfaces will be longer than onnormal surfaces even with ABS. Stop-ping distances may also be longer onrough, gravel or snow covered roads, orif you are using tire chains. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from the ve-hicle in front of you. Ultimately, thedriver is responsible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. For additional in-formation, refer to the ”Tire and load-ing information label” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information”section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels donot lock during hard braking or when braking onslippery surfaces. The system detects the rota-tion speed at each wheel and varies the brakefluid pressure to prevent each wheel from lockingand sliding. By preventing each wheel from lock-ing, the system helps the driver maintain steeringcontrol and helps to minimize swerving and spin-ning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.




WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheelsare close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-plies and releases hydraulic pressure. This actionis similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. Youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear anoise from under the hood or feel a vibration fromthe actuator when it is operating. This is normaland indicates that the ABS is operating properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care is re-quired while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal ex-ceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activatedgenerating greater braking force than a conven-tional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assistbraking operation and is not a collisionwarning or avoidance device. it is the driv-ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safelyand be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitordriver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certaindriving conditions, the VDC System helps to per-form the following functions:

● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheelslip on one slipping drive wheel so power istransferred to a non slipping drive wheel onthe same axle.

● Controls brake pressure and engine outputto reduce drive wheel slip based on vehiclespeed (traction control function).

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheelsand engine output to help the driver maintaincontrol of the vehicle in the following condi-tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not followthe steered path despite increased steer-ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due tocertain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintaincontrol of the vehicle, but it can not prevent lossof vehicle control in all driving situations.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM




When the VDC system operates, the indi-cator in the instrument panel flashes so note thefollowing:

● The road may be slippery or the system maydetermine some action is required to helpkeep the vehicle on the steered path.

● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from under thehood. This is normal and indicates that theVDC system is working properly.

● Adjust your speed and driving to the roadconditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip indicatorlight” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) offindicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theindicator light comes on in the instrument panel.The VDC system automatically turns off whenthese indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The indicator illuminates to indi-cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off thesystem, the VDC system still operates to preventone drive wheel from slipping by transferring

power to a non slipping drive wheel. The

indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC

functions are off and the indicator will notflash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to onwhen the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine andmove the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The VDC system is designed to help thedriver maintain stability but does notprevent accidents due to abrupt steer-ing operation at high speeds or by care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drivecarefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANrecommended for your vehicle or areextremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly. This couldadversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator lightmay flash or illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the indica-tor light may illuminate.

● If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the indicator lightmay illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator light mayflash or illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.




● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator lightmay flashor illuminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving onto astable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the VDCsystem may not operate properly and

the indicator light may flash orilluminate.

● The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTIONDuring braking while driving through turns, thesystem optimizes the distribution of force to eachof the front and rear wheels depending on theradius of the turn.

WARNING

● The VDC system is designed to help thedriver maintain stability but does notprevent accidents due to abrupt steer-ing operation at high speeds or by care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drivecarefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANrecommended for your vehicle or areextremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly. This couldadversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator lightmay flash or illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the indica-tor light may illuminate.

● If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the indicator lightmay illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator light mayflash or illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator lightmay flashor illuminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving onto astable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the VDCsystem may not operate properly and

the indicator light may flash orilluminate.

● The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.




FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole, or use the remote keyless entry key fob orthe NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theantifreeze to assure proper winter protection. Foradditional information, refer to “Engine coolingsystem” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For additional information, refer to “Bat-tery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For additional information, refer to “Changing

engine coolant” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for the tire type, size, speed rating andavailability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional in-formation, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING




● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control (if soequipped) on slippery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.




MEMO




6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-3Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13



Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situationwhile driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switchthree consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switchfor more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency



TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitorstire pressure of all tires except the spare. Whenthe low tire pressure warning light is lit, and theCHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-played in the odometer, one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle isbeing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMSwillactivate andwarn you of it by the low tire pressurewarning light. This system will activate only whenthe vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph(25 km/h). For additional information, refer to“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sections ofthis manual.

WARNING


● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur andmay lead to an accidentand could result in serious personal in-jury. Check the tire pressure for all fourtires. Adjust the tire pressure to therecommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● Since the spare tire is not equippedwiththe TPMS, when a spare tire is mountedor a wheel is replaced, the TPMS willnot function and the low tire pressurewarning light will flash for approxi-mately oneminute. The light will remainon after one minute. Have your tiresreplaced and/or TPMS system reset assoon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for theseservices.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3



WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the CVT is shifted into P(Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and backof the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire toprevent the vehicle from moving when it is jackedup.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpetingand spare tire cover �A . Remove the jackand the spare tire as indicated.

2. To remove the jack, take off the strap and liftout. If necessary, remove the spare tire firstto easily access the jack strap.

LCE2142 LCE2250




Removing wheel cover (if soequipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod�1as illustrated.

Apply cloth�2 between thewheel and jack rod toprevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover orwheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

LCE2207 SCE0630 CE1089




● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts and then remove thetire.

SCE0002




Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. For additional information, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenanceand do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly in the sequenceillustrated (�A ,�B ,�C ,�D ,�E ) until they aretight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (�A ,�B ,�C ,�D ,�E ). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for 3 hours or more or driven lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information Label.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display of the tire pres-sure information may show higher pres-sure than the COLD tire pressure after thevehicle has been driven more than 1 mile(1.6 km).

This is because the tire pressurizes as thetire temperature rises. This does not indi-cate a system malfunction.

5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.

WCE0056




6. Install the jack in its storage area and tightenthe jack strap.

7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floorcarpeting over the damaged tire.

8. Close the trunk.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. Refer to specific instructionsunder the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep allsparks and flames away from thebattery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

LCE2254

JUMP STARTING




● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Fail-ure to do so could result in damage to thecharging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift leverto P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary elec-trical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,etc.).

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-tion.

4. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.

5. Connect the jumper cables in the sequenceillustrated (�A ,�B ,�C ,�D ).

LCE2223




CAUTION

● Always connect positive (�) to positive(�) and negative (�) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

7. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position and wait 3 to4 seconds before trying again.

8. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

CAUTION

● CVT models cannot be push-started ortow-started. Attempting to do so maycause transmission damage.

● Do not push start this vehicle. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading) or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toP (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS




3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine cooling fancan start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

When towing your vehicle, all State and localregulations for towing must be followed. Incor-rect towing equipment could damage your ve-hicle. Towing instructions are available from aNISSAN dealer. Local service operators are gen-erally familiar with the applicable laws and proce-dures for towing. To assure proper towing and toprevent accidental damage to your vehicle,NISSAN recommends having a service operatortow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the ser-vice operator carefully read the following precau-tions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany of these conditions apply, dollies ora flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE




For additional information about towing your ve-hicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to“Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

LCE2267 LCE2259




CAUTION

● Never tow CVT models with the frontwheels on the ground or four wheels onthe ground (forward or backward), asthis may cause serious and expensivedamage to the transmission. If it is nec-essary to tow the vehicle with the rearwheels raised always use towing dolliesunder the front wheels.

● When towing with the front wheels ontowing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch to the OFFposition, and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Formodels with a steering wheel lockmechanism: Never secure the steer-ing wheel by placing the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position. Thismay damage the steering lockmechanism.

– Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)position.

● When towing CVT models with the rearwheels on the ground (if you do not usetowing dollies): Always release theparking brake.

● When towing CVT models with the frontwheels on the ground, dollies must beused or place the vehicle on a flat bedtruck.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personalinjury or death when recovering a stuckvehicle:

● Contact a professional towing serviceto recover the vehicle if you have anyquestions regarding the recoveryprocedure.

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to main structural members of thevehicle.

● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to towor free a stuck vehicle.

● Only use devices specifically designedfor vehicle recovery and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

● Always pull the recovery device straightout from the front of the vehicle. Neverpull at an angle.

● Route recovery devices so they do nottouch any part of the vehicle except theattachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-vice.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)System.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.




4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive) (CVT models).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive) (CVT models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.




7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6



In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain

● after driving on coastal roads

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerto assist you in choosing the proper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care



REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore. It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electricalconductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defogger elements

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if soequipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acidor alkali contents to clean the wheels.

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompoundmay come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily thanwith an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3



This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on thecenter console and door pull finishers. If cleaningis required use mild soap and water. However ifmild soap and water won’t clean the center con-sole and door pull finishers, use NISSAN Vinyland Leather Cleaner (or equivalent).

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-age the seat or Occupant ClassificationSensor (OCS). This can also affect theoperation of the air bag system and resultin serious personal injury.

CAUTION

● Never use benzene, thinner, or any simi-lar material on the interior surfaces orsurface damage may occur. Such dam-age is not covered under the NISSANwarranty.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affectthe vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-manent discoloration when they contact ve-hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-ener in a location that allows it to hang freeand not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause imme-diate damage and discoloration whenspilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-structions before using the air fresheners.

CLEANING INTERIOR




FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference thatmay result in a collision, injury or death:

● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-other floor mat in the driver frontposition.

● Use only Genuine NISSAN floor matsspecifically designed for use in your ve-hicle model. For additional information,it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

● Properly position the mats in the floor-well using the floor mat positioning aid.For additional information, refer to�Floor mat positioning aid� in thissection.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats canextend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-tained with regular cleaning and replaced if theybecome excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

This vehicle includes two driver’s side front floormat brackets and two passenger’s side front floormat brackets to help keep your floor mats inplace. Genuine NISSAN floor mats have beenspecially designed for your vehicle model. Thedriver’s and passenger’s side floor mats have twogrommet holes incorporated in them. Positioneach mat by placing the floor mat bracket hookthrough the floor mat grommet holes while cen-tering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. For additional information,refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety-–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraintsystem” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allowwet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

LAI2009

Appearance and care 7-5



MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

● the accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas

● damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic collisions

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, it isrecommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION




8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . 8-11Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Variable voltage control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . 8-16Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Air conditioner filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27front side marker (except Argentina & Israel) . . . . . . 8-28Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40



Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-mum maintenance requirements with long ser-vice intervals to save you both time and money;however, some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’sgood mechanical condition as well as its emis-sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide”. You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those itemswhichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, it isrecommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ifyou think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and hood Check that all doors and thehood operate smoothly as well as the back door,trunk lid and hatch. Alsomake sure that all latcheslock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make surethat the secondary latch keeps the hood fromopening when the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself



Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck the aim of the headlights.

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. Adjust thepressure in all tires, including the spare, to thepressure specified. Check carefully for damage,cuts or excessive wear.

Tire rotation* In the case that Two-Wheel Drive(2WD) and front and rear tires are same size;Tires should be rotated every 8,000 km(5,000 miles). Tires marked with directional indi-cators can only be rotated between front andrear. Make sure that the directional indicatorspoint in the direction of wheel rotation after thetire rotation is completed.

In the case that Four-Wheel Drive and All WheelDrive (4WD/AWD) and front and rear tires arethe same size; Tires should be rotated every5,000 km (3,000 miles). Tires marked with direc-tional indicators can only be rotated betweenfront and rear. Make sure that the directionalindicators point in the direction of wheel rotationafter the tire rotation is completed.

In the case that front tires are different size fromrear tires; Tires cannot be rotated.

The timing for tire rotation may vary according toyour driving habits and the road surface condi-tions.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components (if so equipped)Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal,valve core and cap when the tires are replaceddue to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, theremay be a need for wheelalignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Repair asnecessary.

Wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if notfunctioning correctly. Replace as necessary.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does notcatch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brake pedal* Check the pedal for smooth op-eration and make sure that it is the proper dis-tance from the floor mat when depressed fully.Check the brake booster function. Be sure tokeep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Parking brake*Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. Check that the lever (if soequipped) or the pedal (if so equipped) has theproper travel. Also make sure that the vehicle isheld securely on a fairly steep hill when only theparking brake is applied.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

SteeringwheelCheck for changes in the steer-ing condition, such as excessive play, hard steer-ing or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure that allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3



Windshield defoggerCheck that the air comesout of the defogger outlets properly and in goodquantity when operating the heater or air condi-tioner.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* “(except for maintenance free bat-teries)” Check the fluid level in each cell. Thefluid should be at the bottom of the filler opening.Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

NOTE:


1. Installation or extended use of electronicaccessories that consume battery powerwhen the engine is not running (Phone char-gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or onlydriven short distances. In these cases, thebattery may need to be charged to maintainbattery health.

Brake (and clutch) fluid level(s)* For ManualTransmission (M/T) model, make sure that thebrake and clutch fluid levels are between theMAX and MIN lines on the reservoirs.

Except for Manual Transmission (M/T) model,make sure that the brake fluid level is between theMAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold. Make sure that thecoolant level is between the MAX and MIN lineson the reservoir.

Engine drive belt(s)* Make sure the drivebelt(s) is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle (on level ground) and turning off theengine.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold with the engine off.Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.




When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift lever to N (Neu-tral). For CVT models, move the shiftlever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced. Itis recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition switch is in the OFF posi-tion and the engine is not running. Toavoid injury, always disconnect thenegative battery cable before workingnear the fan.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or the CVT re-lated component harness connectordisconnected while the ignition switchis in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing, itis recommend that you have it done by aNISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS




MRA8DE engine

1. Engine oil filler cap2. Brake fluid reservoir3. Air cleaner4. Battery5. Fuse and relay box6. Engine coolant reservoir7. Radiator cap8. Engine oil dipstick9. Drive belt location10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2931

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS




The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSANEngine Coolant to provideyear-round anti-freeze and coolant protection.The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-sion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling systemadditives are not necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a GenuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

● Never use any cooling system additivessuch as radiator sealer. Additives mayclog the cooling system and cause dam-age to the engine, transmission and/orcooling system.

● When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSAN En-gine Coolant or equivalent in its qualitywith the proper mixture ratio. Examplesof the mixture ratio are shown below:

CAUTION

The use of other types of coolant solu-tions or coolant colors may damage theengine cooling system.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANEngineCoolant orequivalent inits quality

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water°C °F

-15 5 30% 70%

-35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level�B , add coolant to the MAX level�A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolantlevel in the radiator when the engine is cold. Ifthere is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill theradiator with coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to theMAX level�A .

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

LDI2167

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM




CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

ANISSANdealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks�B . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark�A , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill�C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

MRA8DE

LDI2168 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL




CAUTION

● Oil level should be checked regularly.Operating the engine with an insuffi-cient amount of oil can damage theengine, and such damage is not coveredby warranty.

● It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the se-verity of operating conditions.

Make sure to follow the engine oil changing inter-vals in the maintenance booklet. Operating underthe following conditions may require more fre-quent oil change:

● repeated short distance driving

● driving in dusty conditions

● stop and go commuting.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL


2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap �B by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

�A .

5. Remove the drain plug�A with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

● Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-gine oil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

● Check your local regulations.

LDI2382




6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:34 N·m (25 ft-lb)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual for drainand refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than10 minutes. Check the oil level with thedipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER


2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter�B .

4. Loosen the oil filter �B with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surfacewitha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead toengine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening�A , then install oil fillercap securely.

9. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engineoil if necessary�A .

LDI2383




CAUTION

● NISSAN recommends using GenuineNISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix withother fluids.

● Do not use Automatic transmissionfluid (ATF) or Manual transmission fluidin a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage theCVT. Damage caused by the use of flu-ids other than as recommended is notcovered under NISSAN’s New VehicleLimited Warranty.

● Using fluids that are not equivalent toGenuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 mayalso damage the CVT. Damage causedby the use of fluids other than as recom-mended is not covered under NISSAN’sNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid isrequired, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for servicing.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the level isbelow the MIN line�1 , or the brake warning lightcomes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line�2 . Iffluid must be added frequently, the system shouldbe checked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-cally.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, liftthe cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

LDI2169 LDI0540

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID




Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount ofwindshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine antifreezecoolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methyl al-cohol based washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the windshield-washer fluid reser-voir. Do not use the windshield-washerreservoir to mix the washer fluid con-centrate and water.




Caution symbols for batteryWARNING

�1 No smoking, No exposed flames, No SparksDo not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery isexplosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

�2 Shield eyesHandle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.

�3 Keep away from childrenNever allow children to handle battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

�4

Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blind-ness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly washyour hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it couldcause loss of your eyesight or burns.

�5 Note operating instructionsBefore handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

�6 Explosive gasHydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

BATTERY




● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:


1. Installation or extended use of electronicaccessories that consume battery powerwhen the engine is not running (phone char-gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regulary and/or onlydriven short distances. In these cases, thebattery may need to be charged to maintainbattery health.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to electricalsparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogengas generated by the battery is explo-sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluidto contact your skin, eyes, fabrics orpainted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or severe burns. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce batterylife, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.




1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

● Reinstall the battery vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump start-ing” in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

WDI0224

LDI0302




CAUTION

● Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltagecontrol system. This system measures theamount of electrical discharge from the batteryand controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor�A is located near the batteryalong the negative battery cable. If you add elec-trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure toground them to a suitable body ground such asthe frame or engine block area.

1. Automatic tensioner pulley2. Generator pulley3. Water pump pulley4. Air conditioner compressor pulley5. Crankshaft pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

LDI2178 WDI0638

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM (if so equipped)

DRIVE BELT




1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poorcondition, have it replaced or adjusted. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped�Aspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS




The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.”

To remove the air cleaner filter:

1. Unlatch the retaining clips�A .

2. Pull up at points�B and remove.

3. Pull up and remove air cleaner housing�C .

4. Remove the air cleaner filter.Wipe the insideof the air cleaner filter housing and the coverwith a damp cloth, then replace air cleanerfilter.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, makesure the air cleaner cover is seated in thehousing and latch the clips.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

The air conditioner filter restricts the entry ofairborne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

If replacement is required, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2171

AIR CLEANER




CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield–washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washerfluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is cleanif beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinsethe blades with clear water. If your windshield isstill not clear after cleaning the blades and usingthe wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, followthe procedure below:

1. When ignition switch is ON or within60 seconds after placing the ignition switchfrom ON to OFF position.

2. Quickly push the windshield wiper and washerlever to the mist position twice �2 within1 second. This action will cause the wipers totake the service position automatically.

3. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.


LDI2348


LDI2396

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES




4. Push the release tab�4 .

5. Move the wiper blade down�5 and remove.

6. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

7. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

8. Finally, push the windshield wiper andwasher lever to the mist position �8 . Thisaction will cause the wipers to resume theset position.

LDI2194


LDI2349


LDI2397




CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle�A . This maycause clogging or improper windshield-washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin�B .

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every timethe brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-typebrakes self-adjust every time the parking brake isapplied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if thebrake pedal height does not return to nor-mal. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noisewill be heardwhether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

LDI2182

BRAKES




Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information regard-ing brake inspections, refer to the appropriatemaintenance schedule information in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type�A is used inthe fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type

�B is used in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type �A fuses can be installed in the enginecompartment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

If a type�A fuse is used to replace a type�B fuse,the type�A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type�B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type�A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

LDI0455 LDI0457

FUSES




ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab�A and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller, whichis located in the center of the fuse block inthe passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open�A , replace it with a newfuse�B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI2172 WDI0452




PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The fuse box is located on the driver’s sideof the instrument panel.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Remove the fuse box cover�1 with a suit-able tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging thetrim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller�2 .

5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with anequivalent good fuse�B .

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SDI2576 LDI0456




Extended storage switch

If any electrical equipment does not operate,remove the extended storage switch and checkfor an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used forlong term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-tended storage switch is broken it is notnecessary to replace it. Replace only theopen fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, besure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFFposition.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs�1 and�2 found oneach side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from thefuse box�3 .

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery or removed parts.

LDI2061

BATTERY REPLACEMENT





Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver�A into the slit�Bof the corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part. Use a cloth toprotect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-tric terminals as doing so could cause amalfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact points willseriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-tom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated�C and�D .

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

It is recommend that you visit a NISSAN dealer ifyou need assistance for replacement.

Low power radio frequency devices:

– Manufacturer: ALPS

– Country of origin: CHINA

– Carrier frequency: 433 MHz

– Rated supply voltage and power source:3V lithium batteryWDI0620

WDI0621




– Marca: NISSAN

– Modelo: TWB1G694

– ISR Cert. Number: 51–45383

For RF Tuner:

– Model: TWD1G765

– Manufacturer: ALPS

– Origin: Japan

– ISR Cert. No. 51–45227

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) any interfer-ence received by the device must be ac-cepted, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

HEADLIGHTSReplacing the halogen headlight bulb

CAUTION

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, it is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for a longperiod of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,etc. entering the headlight body mayaffect bulb performance. Remove thebulb from the headlight assembly justbefore a replacement bulb is installed.

● Only touch the base when handling thebulb. Never touch the glass envelope.Touching the glass could significantlyaffect bulb life and/or headlightperformance.

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Access the rear of front headlight�B .

3. Rotate the (high beam) cover �C counter-clockwise to access the (high beam) bulbsocket�E . Rotate the bulb socket�E coun-terclockwise and remove bulb.

4. Rotate the (low beam) cover �D counter-clockwise to access the (low beam) bulbsocket�F . Rotate the bulb socket�F coun-terclockwise and remove bulb.

5. Rotate the sidemarker bulb socket�G coun-terclockwise and remove bulb.

6. Rotate the turn signal bulb socket�H coun-terclockwise and remove bulb�I .

LDI2361

LIGHTS




Reverse instructions to install bulbs and replacefender protector.

WARNING

Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit orright after being turned off. Burning mayresult.

CAUTION

• Do not touch glass surface of the bulbwith bare hands or allow oil or grease toget on it to prevent

damage to bulb.

• Do not leave the bulb out of the lampreflector for a long time because dust,moisture, smoke, etc.

may affect the performance of the lamp.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lensof the exterior lights in the rain or in a carwash. A temperature difference betweenthe inside and the outside of the lenscauses the fog. This is not amalfunction. Iflarge drops of water collect inside thelens, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

FRONT SIDE MARKER (exceptArgentina & Israel)

To replace the front side marker follow the in-structions in the “Replacing the halogen head-light bulb” found in this section.

Turn signal bulb

To replace the turn signal bulb follow the instruc-tions listed in the “Replacing the halogen head-light bulb” found in this section.




FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)Replacing the fog light bulb


2. Remove the fasteners�A ; carefully pull backthe front fender protector .

3. Rotate the bulb �B counterclockwise andpull out to remove.

LDI2179




EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*Low 55 H11High 65 H9Turn (For Argentina & Israel) 21 PY21WTurn (except Argentina & Israel) 7 3157 AKSide Marker (except Argentina & Israel) 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*Low — —High 65 H9Turn (For Argentina & Israel) 21 PY21WTurn (except Argentina & Israel) 7 3157 AKSide Marker (except Argentina & Israel) 5 W5WClearance — —

Front fog light* (if so equipped) 55 H11Front map lights* — —Side repeater (if so equipped) — —Room light 12 AL35Trunk light 3.4 158High-mounted stop light*

Inside — —Spoiler (if so equipped) — —

Rear combination light*Turn signal light 21 WY21WStop/Tail 21 W21WBackup (reversing) 16 W16WRear side marker — —

License plate light* 5 W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

LDI2936




1. Map light2. Interior light3. Side repeater (if so equipped)4. Headlight assembly5. Fog light (if so equipped)6. High-mount stop light7. Trunk light8. License plate light9. Rear combination light

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb replacement

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/orcover.

Use a cloth�1 to protect the interior light hous-ing.

Replacing the rear combination lightbulbs

WDI0257

Interior light

WDI0206





2. Remove the fastener and carefully pushback the carpet.

3. Remove the nuts and pull out the rear com-bination light.

4. Pull the rear combination lamp rearward andremove.

5. Rotate the rear brake light bulb socket �1counterclockwise and remove.

6. Remove the bulb from the socket.

7. Rotate the rear turn signal bulb socket �2counterclockwise and remove.

8. Remove the bulb from the socket.

Reverse steps to install bulbs.

LDI2319

Rear combination light

LDI2359




LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

Replacing the license plate light

1. Position trunk lid finisher aside by removing

�A .

2. Rotate bulb socket �B counterclockwiseand remove from�C .

3. Remove license plate bulb�D from socket�B .

Reverse steps to install bulbs.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” inthe “In case of emergency” section of thismanual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Thosewho use a pacemaker should con-tact the electric medical equipmentmanufacturer for the possible influ-ences before use.

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit and the “Check TirePress” warning appears in the vehicle in-formation display, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pres-sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on

LDI2332

license plate light

LDI2329

WHEELS AND TIRES




the display screen by sending a signalfrom a sensor that is installed in eachwheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to “Lowtire pressure warning light” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section, “Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” section and “Flattire” in the “In case of emergency” sectionof this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The vehicle weight capacityis indicated on the Tire and Load-ing Information label. Do not loadyour vehicle beyond this capacity.Overloading your vehicle may re-sult in reduced tire life, unsafe op-erating conditions due to prema-ture tire failure, or unfavorablehandling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specified ca-pacity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.




Tire and loading information label

�1 Seating capacity: Themaximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicleloading information” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section ofthis manual.

�3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. Therecommended cold tire inflation is setby the manufacturer to provide thebest balance of tire wear, vehiclehandling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” inthis section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI2007




Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original Tire:205/50R17205/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

Rear Original Tire:205/50R17205/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

Spare Tire:T125/70D16

420 kPa, 60 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

LDI0393

Example

WDI0394




�1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

Example

WDI0395




�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment Of Transportation”. The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyesterand others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

�5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

�7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Example

LDI2786




TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on somemod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installingstudded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires onwet or dry surfacesmay bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installedon 205/50R17 size tires. Installation of thetire chains/cables on 205/50R17 size tireswill cause damage to the vehicle. If youplan to use tire chains/cables, you shouldinstall 205/55R16 size tires on yourvehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains.When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). Theminimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners whenrecommended by the tire chain manufacturer toensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent the pos-sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders




or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading yourvehicle when using tire chains. In addition, driveat a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire replac-ing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “Incase of emergency” section of thismanual.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


WDI0258




Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damagemay not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. For additional information,refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equippedwith 4 tires that were the same size andyou are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,install the new tires on the rear axle.Placing new tires on the front axle maycause loss of vehicle control in somedriving conditions and cause an acci-dent and personal injury.

WDI0259




● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics, affect theVDC system and/or interference withthe brake discs. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad wear. For addi-tional information on wheel off-set di-mensions, refer to “Wheels and tires” inthe “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

● Since the spare tire is not equippedwiththe TPMS, when a spare tire is mountedor a wheel is replaced, tire pressure willnot be indicated, the TPMS will notfunction and the low tire pressure warn-ing light will flash for approximately1 minute. The light will remain on after1 minute. Have your tires replacedand/or TPMS system reset as soon aspossible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.


● The TPMS sensor may be damaged if itis not handled correctly. Be carefulwhen handling the TPMS sensor.

● When replacing the TPMS sensor, theID registration may be required. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for ID registration.

● Do not use a valve stem cap that is notspecified by NISSAN. The valve stemcap may become stuck.

● Be sure that the valve stem caps arecorrectly fitted. Otherwise the valvemaybe clogged up with dirt and cause amalfunction or loss of pressure.

● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Evenwith regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.




Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Since the spare tire is not equipped with theTPMS, when a spare tire is mounted (TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMSwill not function.

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly andmay cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.




MEMO




9 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

When traveling or registering in another country. . . . . . 9-11Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-19

Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-20



The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid Types Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 13-1/4 gal 11 gal 50 L• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in thissection.

MRA8DEDrain and refill

With oil filterchange

4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0 L

• Genuine NISSAN engine oil• API grade SL, SM or SN• ILSAC grade GF-3, GF-4,GF-5• ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5, C2 or C3• For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tions” in this section.• For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Without oilfilter change

4 qt 3-3/8 qt 3.8 L

Cooling system With reservoir 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal

6.6 L • Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent.Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality in orderto avoid possible aluminum corrosion within the engine cooling systemcaused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid

— — —

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3.• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3(or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other

fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN

CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Brake fluid — — —• Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base)

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

9-2 Technical and consumer information



Fluid Types Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in this section.• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DH-PS or equivalent• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in this section.• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Windshield-washer fluid 1-1/4 gal 1–1/8 gal 4.8 L• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze fluid or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 95).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designed torun on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 orE-85 fuel in a vehicle not specificallydesigned for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-versely affect the emission control de-vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-age caused by such fuel is not coveredby the NISSAN New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

● Do not use fuel that contains the octanebooster methylcyclopentadienyl man-ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuelcontaining MMT may adversely affectvehicle performance and vehicle emis-sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-beled to indicate MMT content, so youmay have to consult your gasoline re-tailer for more details. Note that Fed-eral and California laws prohibit the useof MMT in reformulated gasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.

Technical and consumer information 9-3



Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether(MTBE) and methanol with or without advertisingtheir presence. NISSAN does not recommendthe use of fuels of which the oxygenate contentand the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask yourservice station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affectthe emission control devices and sys-tems of the vehicle and should not beused. Damage caused by such fuel isnot covered by the NISSAN New Ve-hicle Limited Warranty.

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuelethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 canonly be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-ing pumps to be identified with small, square,orange and black label with the common abbre-viation or the appropriate percentage for thatregion.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.




Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tri-carbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSANdoes not recommend the use of fuel containingMMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle per-formance, including the emissions control sys-tem. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMTcontent, not all do, so you may have to consultyour gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, it is recommended that you have aNISSAN dealer correct the condition. Fail-ure to correct the condition is misuse of thevehicle, for which NISSAN is not respon-sible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forservicing.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.




ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricantsand capacities” in this section. NISSAN recom-mends the use of an energy conserving oil inorder to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. Whenreplacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

LTI2051




Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide” for the mainte-nance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil Type DH-PS or the exactequivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerwhen servicing your air conditioner system.




ENGINE

Model MRA8DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.138 x 3.547 (79.7 x 90.1)

Displacement cu in (cm) 109.71 (1,798)

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

M/T

CVT in N (Neutral) position

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug PLZKAR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

Firing order 1–3–4–2

SPECIFICATIONS




WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum 16 x 6.5J17 x 6.5J

1.77 (45)1.77 (45)

Steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)

Tire size P205/55R16205/50R17

Spare tire T125/70D16




DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Unit: mm (in)

Overall length 4,636 (182.5)

Overall width 1,761 (69.3)

Overall height 1495 (58.9)

Front Track 1,530 (60.2)

Rear Track 1,530 (60.2)

Wheelbase 2,700 (106.3)

Gross vehicle weight rating kg (lb)

Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar be-tween the driver’s side front and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front kg (lb)

Rear kg (lb)




When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or district andregistered, its modifications, transporta-tion and registration are the responsibilityof the user. NISSAN is not responsible forany inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

TI1050M STI0465

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGIN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION




ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M-.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown.This label contains valuable vehicle information,such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR),Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month andyear of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Num-ber (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

LDI2189 STI0349 WTI0189




TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

�1 Position the license plate bracket (1) mount-ing flange, as shown, into the upper centeropening of the front bumper lower grill.

LTI0084 LTI2048

LTI2240

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE




�2 Then, place the license plate bracket (1) onthe front bumper.

�3 Using the screws (2) provided, secure thelicense plate bracket (1) to the front bumperby installing the screws through the outerholes of the license plate bracket (1) into thepre-welded nuts of the front bumper.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximumweight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION




● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label.

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.




Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX lbs or XXXkg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX lbsor XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

Example

WTI0169




5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated instep 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.For additional information, refer to “Mea-surement of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. For additional information, refer to“Tire and loading information label” in thissection.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehicle canbreak, tire damage could occur,or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.




DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesaswell on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING




Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. If the MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-onds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M testcondition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blinkafter 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is“ready”. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or toprepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, in certain colli-sion or near collision-like situations, such as anair bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,data that will assist in understanding how a vehi-cle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period of time, typically30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which collisions andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial collision situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and collision location)are recorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combine the EDR datawith the type of personally identifying data rou-tinely acquired during a collision investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will onlybe accessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-mitted by law.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)




Genuine NISSANService Manuals for this modelyear and prior can be purchased. A GenuineNISSAN Service Manual is the best source ofservice and repair information for your vehicle.This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-ships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals canalso be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of GenuineNISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of GenuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this modelyear and prior, please visit the nearest NISSANdealer. For the phone number and location of aNISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSANInformation Center at 1-800-387-0122 and abilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


� REVIEW COPY—2016 Sentra (sni)Owners Manual—Israel (isr)03/11/16—palsop �


10 IndexA

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System). . . . . . . .5-24Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38Air bag systemFront (See supplemental front impact air bagsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45Side and curtain (See supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-11Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-56, 2-11Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Air conditionerAir conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-16Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-13Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-15Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . .4-14Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-21

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-24Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-8Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-24

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . . . .4-47Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-32, 4-36FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-34FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-34FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42, 4-44iPod® player operation . . . . . . .4-42, 4-44Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38, 4-40USB (Universal Serial Bus) ConnectionPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38, 4-40

Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29AutomaticAutomatic power window switch . . . . .2-41

Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38

B

Back button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28, 8-13Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . .8-26

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System withoutNavigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51Bluetooth® streaming audio with NavigationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47Bluetooth® streaming audio without NavigationSystem (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35BrakeAnti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-24Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-30Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Brake warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-14, 8-21Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-17Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Brightness controlInstrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-7Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30

� REVIEW COPY—2016 Sentra (sni)Owners Manual—Israel (isr)03/11/16—palsop �


C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . .9-2Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . .9-14Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49CD player (See audio system) . . . . . .4-32, 4-36Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Child restraints . . . . . . .1-16, 1-17, 1-18, 1-20LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-25, 1-30, 1-35Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-22

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock setting(models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . .4-5Clock setting (models without NavigationSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-31Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-36Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-12Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . .4-6Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

ControlsHeater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-15

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 2-39Curtain side-impact air bag system(See supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system). . . . . . . . . . .1-53

D

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-30Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16DrivingCold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Emergency engine shutoff. . . . . . . . . .5-9, 6-2Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-12EngineBefore starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . .2-5Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . . . .8-2Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

F

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5FluidBrake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

10-2



Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-45Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2FuelCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-20Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) SystemTire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

G

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20GaugeEngine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

H

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . .6-2Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-28Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32HeaterHeater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-15Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . .4-14Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

I

Ignition SwitchPush-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . .5-7

Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-12In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-8, 2-12, 3-15Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-30Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-30Intelligent Key systemKey operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-12Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 2-43Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42, 4-44iPod® player operation with Navigation System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44iPod® player operation without NavigationSystem (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 8-15

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-25Keyless entryWith Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-12

KeysNISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-6NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-3

10-3



L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-13Emission control information label . . . . .9-12Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-12Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-13Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-11Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-55

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20License plateInstalling the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-13

LightAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-11Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-30Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . .2-7Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 2-43Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . .2-9Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-22Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-47Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-44

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-8, 2-12, 3-15

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-20Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-19

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-22Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-9Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-22Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-14

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-3Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-30

MirrorOutside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-6NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . .5-10

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-5Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4OilCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24OverheatIf your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

10-4



P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

PowerPower door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Precautions on boosterseats . . . . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-25, 1-30, 1-35Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-25, 1-30, 1-35Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . .1-9Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-51FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-34FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-34

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Rear window and outside mirror defoggerswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2RecordersEvent Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Registering a vehicle in another country . . . .9-11

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Child seat belts . . . . .1-18, 1-25, 1-30, 1-35

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Seat beltChild safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-17Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . .1-9Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9, 7-5Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-15Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-12

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-12, 2-11SeatsAdjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Seats/floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Security system (NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Security systemsVehicle security system. . . . . . . .2-24, 2-24

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21ShiftingContinuously Variable Transmission(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-15Side air bag system (See supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag system) .1-53Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-44SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25StartingBefore starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 8-15

10-5



Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11SteeringPower steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-55Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-56, 2-11Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-45Supplemental restraint systemInformation and warning labels . . . . . . .1-55Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-38Supplemental side and curtain side-impact airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53SwitchAutolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-41Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-30Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Temperature gaugeEngine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2TiltTelescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

TireFlat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-43Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-13Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-18Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33, 9-9Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . .2-9

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3TowingFlat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22, 6-11TransmissionContinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Travel (See registering a vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trunk lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-18USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38, 4-40Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-39, 4-41

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port(models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . .4-40USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port(models without Navigation System) . . . . . .4-38

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-16Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-33Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-25Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . .5-25Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-11Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-14

10-6



Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-24, 2-24Vehicle security system (NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System), engine start. . . . . . . .5-10Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-11Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . .2-8Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . . .2-8Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-22Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . .2-9Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-22Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-47Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-12, 2-11Supplemental air bag warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-11TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Vehicle security system. . . . . . . .2-24, 2-24Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-8, 2-12, 3-15Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-55

Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-8, 2-12, 3-15Audible reminders . . . . .2-7, 2-8, 2-12, 3-15Indicator lights . . . . . . .2-7, 2-8, 2-12, 3-15Warning lights . . . . . . .2-7, 2-8, 2-12, 3-15

Warning lights . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-8, 2-12, 3-15

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-10Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33, 9-9Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9When traveling or registering in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-41Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19WiperWiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

10-7



FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 95).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designed torun on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 orE-85 fuel in a vehicle not specificallydesigned for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-versely affect the emission control de-vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-age caused by such fuel is not coveredby the NISSAN New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

● Do not use fuel that contains the octanebooster methylcyclopentadienyl man-ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuelcontaining MMT may adversely affectvehicle performance and vehicle emis-sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-beled to indicate MMT content, so youmay have to consult your gasoline re-tailer for more details. Note that Fed-eral and California laws prohibit the useof MMT in reformulated gasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

● Genuine NISSAN engine oil

● API grade: SL, SM or SN

● ILSAC grade: GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5

● ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5, C2 orC3

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil andoil filter recommendations” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and loading information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the break-in procedure recommenda-tions for the future reliability and economy of yournew vehicle. For additional information, refer to“Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in vehicle damageor shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION


Documents

SENTRA 2016 SENTRA OWNER’S MANUAL - שירות … Sentra... · 2016 SENTRA OWNER’S MANUAL For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. 2016 NISSAN SENTRA B17-D B17-D